MILITARY COTS Switches & Circuit Breakers CATALOG • Rocker • Toggle • Pushbutton • Rotary CIRCUIT PROTECTION • Hydraulic-Magnetic • Thermal • GFCI / ELCI CUSTOM SOLUTIONS • PDU’s • Keypads • Control Modules STRATEGIC MARKETS SERVED: On/Off Highway Marine Telecom/Datacom Military Renewable Energy GLOBAL LOCATIONS: ISO9001:2008 ISO/TS16949:2009 ISO9001:2008 ISO/TS16949:2009 ISO9001:2008 ISO/TS16949:2009 ISO14001:2004 ISO9001:2008 ISO/TS16949:2009 ISO14001:2004 ISO9001:2008 ISO/TS16949:2009 ISO14001:2004 ISO9001:2008 ISO/TS16949:2009 COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGES + Vertical Integration Reliable & On-Time Delivery Excellent Customer Service MULTIPLEXED POWER SYSTEMS • HMI Devices & I/O Modules • Programmable Displays • Data Communication Interfaces • Electrical Systems Monitoring ..................................................................................................................... SWITCHES & CONTROLS ................... Since its founding, Carling Technologies has continually forged a tradition of leadership in quality and product innovation. ................... 1920 There are few products that Carling Technologies hasn’t turned “ON” and fewer industries that haven’t turned to Carling for solutions. With ISO and TS registered manufacturing facilities and technical sales offices worldwide, Carling ranks among the world’s largest manufacturers of circuit breakers, switches, power distribution units, digital switching systems and electronic controls. ................... FOUNDED IN Innovative & Eco-Friendly Products OTHER SERVED INDUSTRIES: Medical Industrial Control Audio / Visual Commercial Food HVAC Floor Care Generators Small Appliances Security Systems Test & Measurment WORLDWIDE NUMBERS: 2200+ 150+ EMPLOYEES ENGINEERS 70 + 50+ DISTRIBUTORS REP FIRMS Military COTS Switches & Circuit Breakers Your Military equipment is only as tough as the components used in building it! Carling Technologies products feature a wide range of switches and circuit breakers that were designed and tested to withstand the rigorous military environment. Carling Technologies COTS products provide military OEMs with a reliable and cost effective solution to their design requirements. By drawing upon over 90 years of design excellence, Carling Technologies is also able to provide switch and circuit breaker custom solutions that are sure to be compliant with the most demanding environmental requirements. Within This Catalog, you will find comprehensive product information for each product series including applications, specifications and ordering schemes. Available Online are tools such as part configurator, product selectors and stock checks. Please visit www.carlingtech.com for the latest information on all our products. Table of Contents page Product Selector Guide.......................................................2 Circuit Breakers MS-Series.............................................................................. 4 A-Series................................................................................. 9 B-Series............................................................................... 35 C-Series............................................................................... 52 E-Series............................................................................... 73 F-Series................................................................................ 82 Time Delay Values.............................................................. 92 Switches & Controls V-Series - Sealed Switch.................................................. 99 V-Series - Rotary Switch................................................. 118 V-Charger - Sealed Control ............................................ 125 W-Series - Submersible Switch..................................... 132 L-Series - Sealed Rocker................................................ 137 Standard Legend Imprinting........................................... 153 F-Series - Toggle Switch................................................. 147 G-Series - Toggle Switch................................................ 149 DK/EK-Series - Toggle Switch....................................... 151 Application Solution Engineers are readily available to assist you in selecting the appropriate product for your application. For further assistance, please email us at [email protected] Custom Design Solutions are available for OEMs that require specific product design and performance. Other Circuit Protection Products such as thermal protection and ground fault circuit protection are also available. Please refer to www.carlingtech.com for a complete list of product offering. www.carlingtech.com 1 Product Selector Guide CIRCUIT PROTECTION MS-Series A-Series B-Series C-Series E-Series F-Series Number of Poles 1-3 1-6 (handle) 1-3 (rocker & metal toggle) 1-6 1-6 (handle) 1-3 (rocker & metal toggle) 1-6 1-3 Actuator Style sealed metal, toggle sealed metal toggle, handle, rocker, paddle handle, rocker sealed metal toggle, handle, rocker handle handle Available Delays DC: instantaneous, short & medium AC, DC, AC/DC: instantaneous, ultrashort, short, medium & long AC, DC: high inrushshort, medium & long AC, DC, AC/DC: instantaneous, ultrashort, short, medium & long AC, DC: high inrushshort, medium & long AC, DC, AC/DC: instant, ultrashort, short, medium & long AC, DC: high inrush-short, medium & long AC, DC, AC/DC: instant, short, medium & long AC, DC, AC/DC: high inrush-short, medium & long AC, DC: short, medium & long 0.02-30A@277VAC, 80VDC 02-30A@125/ 250VAC, 65VDC UL Listed: 0.02-250A@80VDC 0.1-100A@125VDC 0.02-70A@120VAC 0.02-20A@240VAC UL Recognized: 0.02-30A@480WYE/277VAC 2 Pole, 1Ø; 3 Pole, 3Ø 0.02-50A@277VAC 0.02-100A@250VAC, 80VDC 0.02-100A@120V/ 240VAC, 65VDC Max Current & Voltage Ratings Max Interrupting Capacity 0.2-30A@ 65VDC 240VAC, 120/240VAC 3000A, U1@65VDC 2000A, U1@240VAC 2000A, U1@120 /240VAC 0.02-30A@277VAC, 80VDC 31.0-50A@125 /250VAC, 65VDC 7500A@80VDC, UL only 3000A@120/250VAC, UL only 5000A@277VAC, with fuse backup 7500A@80 VDC, UL only 3000A@125/250VAC, UL only 5000A@277VAC, with fuse backup 5A@125VAC 3A@32VDC .1A@125VAC, 32VDC 10.1A@125VAC 0.1A@125VAC (gold 10.1A@125VAC 0.1A@125VAC (gold UL Recognized 0.02-100A@277VAC, 160VDC, 1 pole 0.02-100A@600VAC, 2 Pole 1Ø, 3 pole 3Ø 0.02-120A@125VDC, 1 pole UL Listed: 50000A@80VDC, 1P only 10000A@120VAC 5000A@125VDC/240VAC UL Recognized: 7500A@80VDC 3000A@125/250VAC, UL only 5000A@250VAC UL Listed 50000A@80VDC 10000A@125VDC & 240VAC-5KA 5000A@480WYE/277VAC 10000A@600VAC, listed construction with fuse backup Auxiliary Switch Rating UL Listed 0.02-100A@240VAC, 80VDC, 125VDC UL Recognized 5000A@125VDC 5000A@600VAC, UL489 Listed: 50-250A@125VDC 100-250A@120 /240VAC 100-250A@277VAC 100-250A@208Y /120, 3ØVAC UL489A Listed 250-700A@125VDC 50000A@125VDC 10000A@120/240, 277, 208Y/120VAC without fuse backup with fuse backup contacts) contacts) 10.1A@250VAC 0.1A@125VAC (gold contacts) 0.5A@80VDC 10.1A@250VAC 1.0A@65VDC 0.1A@80VDC 10.1A@250VAC 0.5A@65VDC 0.1A@80VDC series, shunt, relay, switch only, series with remote shutdown, relay & shunt trip dual coil, mid-trip with alarm switch series, shunt, relay, switch only, series with remote shutdown, relay & shunt trip dual coil, mid-trip with alarm switch series, shunt,relay, switch only, series with remote shutdown series & switch only with or without metering shunt 0.5A@65VDC 0.1A@80VDC 0.5A@65VDC 0.1A@80VDC Available Circuits series and switch only series, shunt, relay, switch only, series with remote shutdown, relay & shunt trip dual coil Terminal Options .250” QC tabs 8-32 screw & solder type .250” QC tabs 8-32 & 10-32 screw (& metric), PCB .250” QC tabs, 8-32 & 10-32 screw (& metric), PCB 10-32 stud, 1/4-20 stud, 10-32 screw with saddle clamp, 7/16 clip & push-In 10-32 stud, 1/4-20 stud, 0-32 screw, 1/4-20 screw, box wire connector 3/8-16 stud, 3/8-16 screw & box wire connector Mounting Method front panel threaded inserts: front panel snap-in threaded inserts: front panel snap-in threaded inserts rear or front panel rear or front panel Agency Approvals UL 1077, cUL UL, CSA, VDE, TUV (rocker), UL1500, UL489A (rocker), UL1500, UL, CSA, VDE, TUV, UL1500, UL489, UL489A UL, CSA, VDE, UL1500, UL489 cUL,TUV, UL489, UL489A UL, CSA, VDE, TUV UL489, UL489A *Options and approvals shown may apply to specific construction combinations only, consult factory for clarification. Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specifications without prior notice. 2 www.carlingtech.com Product Selector Guide SEALED SWITCHES & CONTROLS NEW V-Series NEW V-Series Rotary V-Charger W-Series L-Series Poles 1, 2 1, 2 1 1, 2 1, 2 Ratings up to 15A 24VDC 15A 125VAC 10A 250VAC up to 15A 24VDC 20A 12VDC 12V/24V DC up to 10A 24VDC up to 15A 125VAC 10A 250VAC 20A 18VDC Actuator rocker, paddle, locking rocker ergonomic knob sealed spring-loaded access doors bezel-less rocker, paddle & locking rocker rocker, paddle, locking rocker Mounting Hole Specifications .830” x 1.450” [21.08mm x 36.83mm] snap-in mount .830” x 1.450” [21.08mm x 36.83mm] snap-in mount .830” x 1.450” [21.08mm x 36.83mm] snap-in mount .830” x 1.450” [21.08mm x 36.83mm] snap-in mount .867” x 1.734” Termination .250 tabs solder lug wire leads solder lugs .250 tabs wire leads .250 tabs .110 tabs .187 tab .250 tabs Sealing IP66 above panel IP67 above panel IP64 above panel IP68 above and below panel, fully submersible IP67 above panel Illumination incandescent, LED, neon incandescent, LED LED LED incandescent, LED Approvals UL, CSA, VDE pending n/a n/a n/a [22mm x 44mm] snap-in mount TOGGLES SWITCHES F-Series G-Series DK / EK-Series Poles 1 1, 2 1, 2 Ratings up to 20A 125VAC 20A 277VAC 2 HP 250VAC up to 20A 125VAC 20A 277VAC 2 HP 250VAC up to 20A 125VAC/DC 10A 250VAC/DC Actuator paddle, toggle (bat) paddle, toggle (bat) toggle (bat), toggle (ball) Mounting Hole Specifications .500” dia [12.7mm] bushing mount .500” dia [12.7mm] bushing mount .500” dia [12.7mm] bushing mount Termination .187 tabs solder lug .250 tabs screw terms wire leads PC terms .187 tabs solder lug .250 tabs screw terms wire leads PC terms screw terms Sealing optional bushing o-ring optional bushing o-ring optional bushing o-ring Illumination n/a n/a n/a Approvals UL, CSA, VDE UL, CSA, VDE UL, CSA *Options and approvals shown may apply to specific construction combinations only, consult factory for clarification. www.carlingtech.com 3 MS-Series MS-Series Circuit Breaker - Introduction MS-Series CIRCUIT BREAKER Designed and tested to operate flawlessly in the harshest of environments, the MS-Series sealed toggle circuit breaker is ideally suited for COTS (commercial off the shelf) military applications. Our space saving envelope meets IP68 requirements and features a durable metal and sealed mounting bushing with MIL-PRF-39019F ingress protection when mounted in a panel. This class-leading, affordable circuit breaker was designed in accordance with the requirements of MILPRF-55629 and MIL STD 202, making it the best choice for those applications where shock, vibration, moisture resistance, salt spray and thermal shock are of the utmost consideration. The MS-Series’ compact size and reliability make it ideal for crucial communication equipment and other mission critical components. 1-3 poles; 0.20-30 amps; 65VDC, 240VAC, 120/240VAC; UL, CUL recognized & TUV pending. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Watch Product Video Product Highlights: Sealed Toggle Actuator MIL-PRF-39019F Ingress Protection MIL-PRF-55629 and MIL STD 202 Compliant Compact Design 4 www.carlingtech.com MS-Series Circuit Breaker - Design Features MS-Series DESIGN FEATURES SEALS IP68 Designed and tested to comply with MIL-PRF-39019F Ingress Protection COMPACT SIZE Max performance in compact size: 0.20-30 Amps; 65 VDC, 240 VAC 120/240 VAC 1.375 in [34.93 mm] 0.65 in [16.51 mm] TERMINAL BARRIERS Meet UL 1077 Spacing Requirements www.carlingtech.com 2.158 in [54.81 mm] OPTIONAL AUXILIARY SWITCH Provides Breaker Status Indication 5 MS-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table A: Lists UL & cUL Configuration & Performance Capabilities MS-SERIES TABLE A: COMPONENT SUPPLEMENTARY PROTECTORS Short Circuit Capacity (Amps)1 UL / cUL TUV Purpose Poles Max Rating Frequency Phase General Amps Breaking U1 U3 Inc 2 Icn 65 DC --0.02 - 30 1 3000 300 3000 300 240 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 30 1, 2 2000 300 3000 300 120 / 240 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 30 2 or 3 2000 300 3000 300 Voltage Circuit Configuration Series Current Rating Notes: 1 Short Circuit Current Rating (SC) Codes — The short-circuit current rating, followed by a letter and number designating the test conditions and any calibration following the short-circuit test as defined below: 2 Inc Rating obtained with a 50 Amp type gL fuse U - Indicates that the short circuit test was performed without a series fuse U1 - Indicates that a re-calibration was not performed as part of the short circuit testing U3 - Indicates that the protector has proven to be suitable for further use after the short circuit test Re-calibration, dielectric strength and voltage withstand tests were performed after the short circuit testing Electrical Current Ratings .02 - 30 Amps Voltage Rating 65VDC, 240VAC, 120/240VAC Short Circuit Rating See Table A Auxiliary Switch Rating 5A @ 125VAC, 3A @ 32VDC, .1A @ 125VAC, 32VDC Dielectric Strength UL,CSA 1500V, 50/60 Hz for one minute between all electrically isolated terminals. Insulation Resistance Minimum of 100 Megohms @ 500VDC Time Delay See delay curve Impedance CURRENT TOLERANCE (AMPS) (%) 0.20 - 30.0 25 Physical Number of Poles 1-3 poles Weight Approximately 1.8 oz (50 G) per pole Dimensions See form & fit drawing Agency Certifications UL Standard 1077 Mechanical Current Ratings 10,000 On-Off operations @ 6 per minute with rated current and voltage. Trip Free Trips on short circuit and overload, even when the actuator is forcibly held in the “On” position. Trip Indication The operating handle moves positively to the “Off” position when a short circuit or overload causes the circuit breaker to trip. Environmental Designed in accordance with requirements of specification MIL PRF-55629 & MIL-STD-202G as follows: Shock Withstands 100G’s, 6ms, saw tooth while carrying rated current per Method 213, Condition I. Instantaneous curves tested at 80% of rated current. Vibration Withstands 0.060” excursion from 10-55 Hz, and 10G’s 55-500 Hz, at rated current per Method 204C, Test Condition A. Instantaneous curves tested at 80% of rated current. Salt Spray Method 101, Condition A (90- 95% RH @ 5% NaCl Solution, 96 hrs) Moisture Resistance Method 106G Thermal Shock Method 107D, Condition A (Five cycles @ -55°C to +25°C to +85°C to +25°C Operating Temperature -40°C to +85°C Ingress Protection Level MIL-PRF-55629C when mounted in panel. Other Materials used in this product are non-nutrient to fungus growth. CUL Standard C22.2 *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 6 www.carlingtech.com MS-Series Circuit Breaker - Ordering Scheme M S 1 1 Series 2 Actuator 3 Poles B 14 615 4 Circuit 5 Frequency & Delay 6 Current Rating C 7 Terminal 1 C B 8 Actuator Color 9 10 Front Legend Panel Plate Hardware A 0A A 11 Bushing Color 12 Voltage Code 13 Agency Approval 7 TERMINAL 1 Push-On 0.250 Tab (QC) 2 Screw 8-32 (Upturned Lugs) 3 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) C Screw Terminal M4 (Upturned Lugs) E Screw Terminal M4 (Bus Type) L Solder Lug 1 SERIES M 2 ACTUATOR S Sealed Toggle 3 POLES 1 One 2Two 8 ACTUATOR & MARKING COLOR 1 Dull Metallic 3Three 4 CIRCUIT A Switch Only (no coil) 1, 2 B Series Trip (current) M Series Trip (current) Aux switch .110 QC x 0.20 QC (silver contacts) 9 Series Trip (current) Aux switch .110 QC x 0.20 QC (gold contacts) 5 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 DC, 50/60 Hz, Switch Only 1 10 DC, Instantaneous 12 DC, Short 14 DC, Medium 20 50/60 Hz Instantaneous 22 50/60 Hz Short 24 50/60 Hz Medium 30 DC, 50/60 Hz Instantaneous 32 34 62 64 72 74 92 94 DC, 50/60 Hz Short DC, 50/60 Hz Medium 50/60 Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 4 50/60 Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 4 DC, Short, High-Inrush 4 DC, Medium, High-Inrush 4 DC, 50/60 Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 4 DC, 50/60 Hz Medium, In-rush 4 9 FRONT PANEL HARDWARE A No Outer Panel Hardware B Hex Nut, Nickel Plated C Hex Nut, Nickel Plated with Locking Ring F Panel Dress Nut, Nickel Plated G Panel Dress Nut, Nickel Plated with Locking Ring 10 LEGEND PLATE A No Legend Plate B On-Off Vertical C On-Off Horizontal D I-O Vertical E I-O Horizontal F Dual Vertical G Dual Horizontal 6 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) CODEAMPERES 220 0.200 225 0.250 230 0.300 235 0.350 240 0.400 2450.450 250 0.500 255 0.550 260 0.600 265 0.650 270 0.700 275 0.750 280 0.800 285 0.850 290 0.900 295 410 512 415 517 420 522 425 527 430 435 440 445 450 455 0.950 1.00 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.50 4.00 4.50 5.00 5.50 460 465 470 475 480 485 490 495 610 710 611 711 612 712 613 6.00 6.50 7.00 7.50 8.00 8.50 9.00 9.50 10.00 10.50 11.00 11.50 12.00 12.50 13.00 614 615 616 617 717 618 619 620 622 624 625 630 14.00 15.00 16.00 17.00 17.50 18.00 19.00 20.00 22.00 24.00 25.00 30.00 11 BUSHING COLOR A Nickel Plated / Multipole Version 12 VOLTAGE CODE 0A 65 VDC 0D 240 VAC 0C 120/240 VAC 3 0N 65 VDC / 120/240 VAC 3 17 65 VDC / 240 VAC 13 AGENCY APPROVAL A Without approvals B UL Recognized C UL & cUL Recognized Notes: 1 Series code “A” only available with delay code “03” 2 Only available when tied to a protected pole 3 Requires a 2 or 3 pole device 4 Only available without agency approvals (Approval Code A) www.carlingtech.com 7 MS-Series Circuit Breaker - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 8 www.carlingtech.com A-Series A-Series Circuit Breaker - Introduction A-Series CIRCUIT BREAKER Well known for their proven reliability, Carling Technologies’ A-Series hydraulic magnetic circuit breakers are compact, temperature stable and designed for precision operation in OEM markets requiring general purpose as well as full load amp applications. When front panel operation and aesthetics demand a clean, contemporary design, the visi-rocker or paddle actuators are ideally suitable. A sealed toggle actuator style is also available and ideal for harsh environment applications requiring additional sealing protection. Optional rocker-guard and pushto-reset bezels, which help prevent inadvertent actuation, are also available. 1-6 poles; ratings from 0.02 to 50 amps, up to 277VAC or 80VDC; UL Recognized, UL Listed, UL1500, UL1077, TUV, VDE & CSA Product Highlights: Up to 50 amps in a compact size Various actuator styles Sealed metal toggle option tested to MIL-PRF-55629C. Meets IP68 Requirements Only Military applicable ordering schemes and drawings are shown in this catalog. For complete product details, please visit www.carlingtech.com www.carlingtech.com 9 A-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Maximum Voltage 277VAC 50/60 Hz, 80VDC Current Ratings Standard current coils: 0.100, 0.250, 0.500, 0.750, 1.00, 2.50, 5.00, 7.50, 10.0, 15.0, 20.0, 25.0, 30.0, 35.0, 40.0, 50.0. Other ratings available - consult ordering scheme. Standard Voltage Coils DC-6V, 12V; AC-120V, Other ratings available, consult ordering scheme. Auxiliary Switch Rating SPDT; 10.1 A - 250VAC, 1.0 A-65VDC/0.5 A - 80 VDC, 0.1A - 125VAC (with gold contacts). Insulation Resistance Minimum: 100 Megohms at 500 VDC Dielectric Strength UL, CSA - 1500V 60 Hz for one minute between all electrically isolated terminals. A-Series rocker circuit breakers comply with the 8mm spacing & 3750V dielectric requirements from hazardous voltage to operator accessible surfaces per EN 60950 and VDE 0805. Resistance, Impedance Values from Line to Load Terminal - based on Series Trip Circuit Breaker. RESISTANCE PER POLE VALUES from Line to Load Terminals (Values Based on Series Trip Circuit Breaker) CURRENT TOLERANCE (AMPS) (%) 0.10 - 5.0 5.1 - 20.0 15 25 20.1 - 50.0 35 Pulse Tolerance Curves Mechanical Endurance Trip Free Trip Indication 10,000 ON-OFF operations @ 6 per minute; with rated Current & Voltage. All A-Series Circuit Breakers will trip on overload, even when the actuator is forcibly held in the ON position. The operating actuator moves positively to the OFF position when an overload causes the circuit breaker to trip. When mid-trip handle is specified, the handle moves to the mid position on electrical trip of the circuit breaker. When mid-trip handle with alarm switch is specified, the handle moves to the mid position & the alarm switch actuates when the circuit breaker is electrically tripped. Physical Number of Poles 1 - 6 Poles (handle) and 1-3 poles (rocker) at 30 Amps or less. 1 and 2 poles at 31 Amps thru 50 Amps. Internal Circuit Config. Series, (with or without auxiliary switch), Shunt and Relay with current or voltage trip coils, Dual Coil, Switch Only with or without auxiliary switch. Weight Approximately 65 grams/pole. (Approximately 2.32 ounces/pole) Standard Colors Housing - Black; Actuator- See Ordering Scheme. Environmental Designed and tested in accordance with requirements of specification MIL-PRF-55629 & MIL-STD-202 as follows: Shock Withstands 100 Gs, 6ms, sawtooth while carrying rated current per Method 213, Test Condition “I”. Instantaneous and ultra-short curves tested @ 90% of rated current. Vibration Withstands 0.060” excursion from 10-55 Hz, and 10 Gs 55-500 Hz, at rated current per Method 204C, Test Condition A. Instantaneous and ultrashort curves tested at 90% of rated current. Moisture Resistance Method 106D; ten 24-hour cycles @ + 25°C to +65°C, 80-98% RH.56 days @ +85°C, 85% RH. Salt Spray Method 101, Condition A (90-95% RH @ 5% NaCl Solution, 96 hrs). Thermal Shock Method 107D, Condition A (Five cycles @ -55°C to +25°C to +85°C to +25°C). Operating Temperature -40° C to +85° C *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 10 www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table A: Lists UL Recognized & CSA Accepted configurations and performance capabilities as a Component Supplementary Protector. A-SERIES TABLE A: COMPONENT SUPPLEMENTARY PROTECTORS Voltage Circuit Configuration Series Max Rating Current Rating Load Frequency Phase Full Amps 32 65 DC DC ----- 80 DC --- 125 125 125 125 / 250 125 / 250 50 / 60 50 / 60 50 / 60 50 / 60 50 / 60 1 1 14 13 13 1 250 50 / 60 14 3 Dual Coil 277 32 65 50 / 60 DC DC 1 ----- 80 DC --- 125 50 / 60 1 125 125 / 250 125 / 250 50 / 60 50 / 60 50 / 60 14 13 13 1 1 1 14 250 50 / 60 3 Shunt Relay Switch Only 277 80 125 / 250 50 / 60 DC 50 / 60 250 50 / 60 277 80 125 / 250 50 / 60 DC 50 / 60 250 50 / 60 277 65 80 50 / 60 DC DC 250 50 / 60 277 50 / 60 1 --1 1 3 1 --13 1 3 1 ----1 3 1 0.02 - 15 31 - 50 0.02 - 30 --0.02 - 30 1 - 50 1 - 50 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 50 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 --1 - 50 0.02 - 30 31 - 50 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 50 0.02 - 50 0.02 - 30 --0.02 - 30 1 - 50 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 50 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 --1 - 50 0.02 - 30 31 - 50 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 30 0.02 - 50 0.02 - 30 --0.02 - 50 0.02 - 30 General Purpose Amps ------31 - 50 ----------------------------31 - 50 --------------31 - 50 --------------------------------31 - 50 --31 - 50 Short Circuit Capacity (Amps) UL / CSA With Backup Without Fuse Backup Fuse --5000 --7500 --7500 --7500 --3000 --2000 --1000 --3000 --3000 --1500 --3000 --3000 --1000 5000 2 --2000 1 --5000 1 ----5000 --7500 --7500 --7500 --3000 --2000 --1000 --3000 --3000 --1500 --3000 --3000 --1000 5000 2 --2000 1 --5000 1 ----7500 --3000 --3000 5000 2 --5000 1 ----7500 --3000 --3000 5000 2 --5000 1 --- Application Codes UL CSA TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL0, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U2 TC1, OL0, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 TC3, OL1, U3 TC1, 2, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL0, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC3, OL1, U3 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 TC3, OL1, U3 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U2 TC1, OL0, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, 2, OL0, U1 TC3, OL1, U3 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, U1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 TC1, 2, OL1, C1 Construction Notes Rocker Version Rocker Version Handle Single Pole Break Two Pole Break Rocker Version Rocker Version Single Pole Break Two Pole Break not applicable Notes: 1 Requires branch circuit backup with a UL LISTED Type K5 or RK5 fuse (15A minimum) at no more than 4 times the rating of the protector. 2 Same as note 1, except that backup fuse is limited to 80 A maximum. 3 2 pole protector required (with one pole per power line) for: 125/250 VAC, 1 pole protector required for : 125 VAC, 1Ø Power System. 4 Satisfies the requirements of clause 11.2.8.2.5 of CSA STD C22.2 No 100 for the use of supplementary protectors with portable generators. www.carlingtech.com 11 A-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table B: Lists UL Recognized, CSA Accepted, VDE & TUV Certified configurations & performance capabilities as a Component Supplementary Protector. 1 3 2 3 2 3 2 Notes: 1 General Purpose Ratings for UL/CSA Only. 2 Requires branch circuit backup with a UL LISTED Type K5 or RK5 fuse (15A minimum) at no more than 4 times the rating of the protector. 3 Same as note 2, except that backup fuse is limited to 80 A maximum. 4 Satisfies the requirements of clause 11.2.8.2.5 of CSA STD C22.2 No 100 for the use of supplementary protectors with portable generators. 12 www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table C: Lists UL Recognized, CSA Accepted configurations and performance capabilities as Protectors, Supplementary for Marine Electrical and Fuel Systems (Guide PEQZ2, File E75596). Ignition Protected per UL 1500. UL Classified Small Craft Electrical Devices, Marine in accordance with ISO 8846 (Guide UZMK, File MQ1515) as Marine Supplementary Protectors. A-SERIES TABLE C: UL1500 (Marine Ignition Protected) VOLTAGE CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION CURRENT RATING SHORT CIRCUIT CAPACITY (AMPS) APPLICATION CODES MAX. RATING FREQUENCY PHASE FULL LOAD AMPS WITHOUT BACKUP FUSE UL CSA 14 1 DC --- 0.02 - 50 5000 TC1,OL1,U1 TC1,OL1,U1 32 1 65 DC --- 0.02 - 50 5000 TC1,OL1,U2 TC1,OL1,U2 DC --- 0.02 - 50 3000 TC1,OL1,U1 TC1,OL1,U1 125 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 50 3000 TC1,OL1,U2 TC1,OL1,U2 125 / 250 50 / 60 12 0.02 - 50 3000 TC1,OL1,U2 TC1,OL1,U2 250 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 30 1500 TC1,OL1,U1 TC1,OL1,U1 SERIES Notes: Notes: 1 Available with special catalog number only (consult factory). 2 2 pole protector required (with one per power line) for 125 / 250 VAC. 1 pole protector required for 125 VAC 1 phase power system 1 Available with Special Catalog Number Only (consult factory) 2 2 pole protector required (with one per power line) for 125 / 250 VAC. 1 pole protector required for 125 VAC 1 phase power system Table D: Lists UL Listed configurations and performance capabilities as Circuit Breakers for use in Communications Equipment (Guide DITT, File E189195), under UL489A. Notes: 1 Parallel Pole Construction Agency Certifications UL Recognized UL Standard 1077 Component Recognition Program as Protectors Supplementary (Guide CCN/QVNU2, File E75596) CSA Accepted Component Supplementary Protector under Class 3215 30, File 047848 0 000 CSA Standard C22.2 No. 235 UL Standard 508 Switches, Industrial Control (Guide CCN/NRNT2, File E148683) TUV Certified EN60934, under License No. R72103448 UL Standard 1500 Protectors, Supplementary for Marine Electrical & Fuel Systems (Guide PEQZ2, File E75596) Ignition Protection VDE Certified EN60934, VDE 0642 under File No. 10537 UL Listed UL Standard 489A www.carlingtech.com Communications Equipment (Guide CCN/DITT, File E189195) 13 A-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle UL Recognized – Ordering Scheme A A 3 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 10 450 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 1 SERIES A 11 Agency Approval CODEAMPERES 3 4 Three Four 5 6 Five Six 4 CIRCUIT A 2 Switch Only (No Coil) F 3 B Series Trip (Current) G 3 C Series Trip (Voltage) H 3,4 D 3 Shunt Trip (Current) 3 E Shunt Trip (Voltage) K 3,4 Relay Trip (Current) Relay Trip (Voltage) Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Voltage Coil Dual Coil with Relay Trip Voltage Coil 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 5 5 0 without Aux Switch 1 S.P.D.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. 7 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 8 (Gold Contacts) 9 S.P.S.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 DC Instantaneous 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 50/60Hz Instantaneous 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 30 DC, 50/60Hz Instantaneous 31 DC, 50/60Hz Ultra Short 32 DC, 50/60Hz Short 34 DC, 50/60Hz Medium 36 DC, 50/60Hz Long 42 7 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 44 7 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 46 7 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush 52 7 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 54 7 DC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 56 7 DC, Long, Hi-Inrush Notes: 1 Actuator Code: A: Handle tie pin spacer(s) and retainers provided un-assembled with multi-pole units. B: Handle location as viewed from front of breaker: 2 pole - left pole 3 pole - center pole 4 pole - two handles at center poles 5 pole - three handles at center poles 6 pole - four handles at center poles S: Handle moves to mid-position only upon electrical trip of the breaker. Available with circuit codes B, C, D, E, F, G, H and K. T: Handle moves to mid-position and alarm switch activates only upon electrical trip of the breaker. Available with circuit codes B & C. 2 Switch Only circuits, rated up to 50 amps and 6 poles, and only available when tied to a protected pole (Circuit Code B, C, D or H.), For .02 to 30 amps, select Current Code 630. For 35 - 50 amps, select Current Code 650. 3 Available with terminal Codes 1, 2 and 3. Current Rating limited to 50A amps maximum. 4 Consult factory for available Dual Coil options, as special catalog number is required. With Shunt construction, Dual Coils will trip instantaneously on line voltage. Dual coils require 30VA minimum power to trip and are rated for intermittent duty only. 5 Auxiliary Switch breakers with Series Trip & Switch Only circuits: ≤ 30A - supplied with standard half shells. 35-50A - supplied with extended boat (B-Style) half shells. On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 6 Separate pole type voltage coils not rated for continuous duty. Available only with delay codes 10 and 20. 7 Available with Circuit Codes B & D only. VDE Certified to 30 amps. UL Recognized, CSA Accepted & TUV Certified to 50 amps. 8 VDE Certification available with single pole breakers with DC Delay only. UL Recognition and CSA Accepted available in one and two pole breakers. 9 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. Ratings over 30 amps are only available with Terminal Codes 5, 9, G, H, M and Q.. 10 Terminal Code 1: VDE Certification up to 25 amps and UL Recognition and CSA Certification up to 30 amps, but not recommended over 20 amps. 11 Terminal Codes 3, 5, E and H (Bus Type) with VDE, are supplied with Lock Washers, and Terminal Code M (M6 Threaded Stud) with VDE is supplied with Lock and Flat Washers. These breakers are only VDE Certified when the washers are used. 12 Terminal Code L: VDE Certified available up to 12A. UL Recognized & CSA Accepted available up to 30A. 13 Single pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 30 amps with VDE Certification and 50 amps with UL Recognition and CSA Accepted, with Circuit Codes A, B and C. Two pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 40 amps with UL Recognition and CSA Accepted with Circuit Codes A, B and C. 14 Terminal Code Q not available with VDE certification. 15 Single pole only. 14 C 10 Mounting/ Barriers 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 2 ACTUATOR 1 A Handle, one per pole B Handle, one per multipole unit S Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole T Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole & Alarm Switch 3 POLES 1 One 2 Two 1 B 1 8 9 Terminal Actuator Color 0200.020 2250.250 4202.000 0250.025 2300.300 5222.250 0300.030 2350.350 5272.750 0350.035 2400.400 4303.000 0400.040 2450.450 4353.500 0450.045 2500.500 4404.000 0500.050 2550.550 4454.500 0550.055 2600.600 4505.000 0600.060 2650.650 4555.500 0650.065 2700.700 4606.000 0700.070 2750.750 4656.500 0750.075 2800.800 4707.000 0800.080 2850.850 4757.500 0850.085 2900.900 4808.000 0900.090 2950.950 4858.500 0950.095 4101.000 4909.000 2100.100 5121.250 4959.500 2150.150 4151.500 610 10.000 2200.200 517 1.750 71010.500 OR VOLTAGE COIL (NORMAL RATED VOLTAGE) 6 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 835.000 640 840.000 645 845.000 650 850.000 CODEAMPERES A06 6 DC A12 12 DC A18 18 DC A24 24 DC A32 32 DC A48 48 DC A65 65 DC J06 6 AC J12 J18 J24 J48 12 AC 18 AC 24 AC 48 AC J65 65 AC K20 120 AC L40 240 AC 8 TERMINAL 9 1 10 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) E 11 Screw M4 (Bus Type) 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs F Screw M5 with upturned lugs 11 3 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs G Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 11 11 5 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) H Screw M5 (Bus Type) 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs L 12 0.250 Q.C./ Solder Lug & 30° bend M 11 M6 Threaded Stud 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) Q 14Push-In Stud & 30° bend R Screw M4 with upturned lugs 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs & 30° bend & 30° bend T 11 Screw M4 (Bus Type) 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend & 30° bend P 13 Printed Circuit Board Terminals B Screw M5 with upturned lugs S 13 Push-On 0.110 Tab (Q.C.) C Screw M4 with upturned lugs 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND Actuator Color I-O ON-OFF White AB Black CD Red FG Green HJ Blue KL Yellow MN Gray PQ Orange RS Black (short handle)15 TU Dual Legend Color 1Black 2White 3White 4White 5White 6Black 7Black 8Black 9White 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS MOUNTING STYLE Threaded Insert, 2 per pole 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches A 6-32 x 0.195 inches 2 ISO M3 x 5mm B ISO M3 x 5mm (multipole only) Front panel Snap-In, 0.75” wide bezel 5 without Handleguard 6 without Handleguard (multipole only) Front panel Snap-In, 0.96” wide bezel 7 without Handleguard, 1-pole 0.96” wide; multipole units have .105” bezel overhang on all sides 8 without Handleguard, 1-pole 0.96” wide; (multipole only) .105” bezel overhang on all sides BARRIERS no yes no yes no yes no yes 11 AGENCY APPROVAL C UL Recognized & CSA Accepted D VDE Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted E TUV Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted I UL Recognized STD 1077, UL Recognized 1500 (ignition protected), & CSA Accepted www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle UL489A – Ordering Scheme A A 1 1 Series 2 Actuator 3 Poles B 0 4 Circuit 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 14 450 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 2 ACTUATOR 1 A Handle, one per pole S Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole T Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole & Alarm Switch 3 POLES 2 1 One 2 Two 3 Three 4 Four 4 CIRCUIT B Series Trip (Current) 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long S.P.S.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 52 3 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 54 3 DC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 56 3 DC, Long, Hi-Inrush 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) CODEAMPERES 2100.100 2150.150 2200.200 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 2850.850 2900.900 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 4151.500 517 1.750 4202.000 5222.250 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 610 10.000 71010.500 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 335.000 640 340.000 645 345.000 650 350.000 8 TERMINAL 5 1 6 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs & 30° bend 3 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) B Screw M5 with upturned lugs 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs F Screw M5 with upturned lugs 5 7 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs G Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend & 30° bend H Screw M5 (Bus Type) 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) M 7 M6 Threaded Stud & 30° bend P 8 Printed Circuit Board Terminals 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs Q 9 Push-In Stud & 30° bend www.carlingtech.com 8 Terminal 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers M T 11 Max. Appl. Rating 12 Agency Approval 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND Actuator Color ON-OFF Dual Legend Color White B1 Black Black D2 White Red G3White Green J4White Blue L5White Yellow N6Black Gray Q7Black Orange S8Black Black (short handle) 10 U9White 1 SERIES A 5 AUXILIARY/ALARM SWITCH 2 7 0 without Aux Switch 1 S.P.D.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. 8 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 9 1 B 1 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS MOUNTING STYLE Threaded Insert, 2 per pole 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches A 6-32 x 0.195 inches 2 ISO M3 x 5mm B ISO M3 x 5mm (multipole only) Front panel Snap-In, 0.75” wide bezel 5 without Handleguard 6 without Handleguard (multipole only) Front panel Snap-In, 0.96” wide bezel 7 without Handleguard, 1-pole 0.96” wide; multipole units have .105” bezel overhang on all sides 8 without Handleguard, 1-pole 0.96” wide; (multipole only) .105” bezel overhang on all sides BARRIERS no yes no yes no yes no yes 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING M 80 DC 12 AGENCY APPROVAL T UL489A Listed K UL489A Listed, VDE Certified J UL489A Listed, TUV Certified Notes: 1 Actuator Code: A: Handle tie pin spacer(s) and retainers provided un-assembled with multi-pole units. S: Handle moves to mid-position only upon electrical trip of the breaker. T: Handle moves to mid-position and alarm switch activates only upon electrical trip of the breaker. 2 On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 3 VDE Certified to 30 amps. UL489A Listed to 50 amps. 4 VDE Certification available with single pole breakers only. UL489A Listing available with one and two pole breakers. 5 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. Ratings over 30 amps are only available with Terminal Codes 5, 9 G, H, M and Q. 6 Terminal Code 1 (Push-On) available up to 25 amps with VDE Certification and 30 amps with UL489A Listing, but is not recommended over 20 amps. 7 Terminal Codes 3, 5 and H (Bus Type) with VDE, are supplied with Lock Washers, and Terminal Code M (M6 Threaded Stud) with VDE is supplied with Lock and Flat Washers. These breakers are only VDE Certified when the washers are used. 8 Single pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 30 amps with VDE Certification and 50 amps with UL489A Listing. 9 Terminal Code Q not available with VDE certification. 10 Single pole only. 15 A-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle WORLD – Ordering Scheme A A 3 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 14 450 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 1 SERIES A 2 ACTUATOR 1 A Handle, one per pole B Handle, one per multipole unit S Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole T Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole & Alarm Switch 3 POLES 1 One 2 Two 3 4 Three Four 5 6 4 CIRCUIT A 2 Switch Only (No Coil) D 3 B Series Trip (Current) E 3 C Series Trip (Voltage) H 3,4 Five Six Shunt Trip (Current) Shunt Trip (Voltage) Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Voltage Coil 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 5 0 without Aux Switch 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 DC Instantaneous 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 50/60Hz Instantaneous 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 30 DC, 50/60Hz Instantaneous 31 DC, 50/60Hz Ultra Short 32 DC, 50/60Hz Short 34 DC, 50/60Hz Medium 36 DC, 50/60Hz Long 42 7 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 44 7 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 46 7 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush 52 7 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 54 7 DC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 56 7 DC, Long, Hi-Inrush 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 1 A 1 8 Terminal 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers P 11 Agency Approval 8 TERMINAL 9 1 10 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) B Screw M5 with upturned lugs 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs C Screw M4 with upturned lugs 3 11 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) E 11 Screw M4 (Bus Type) 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs F Screw M5 with upturned lugs 5 11 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs G Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 11 & 30° bend H Screw M5 (Bus Type) 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) R Screw M4 with upturned lugs & 30° bend & 30° bend 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs T 11 Screw M4 (Bus Type) & 30° bend & 30° bend 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND Actuator Color I-O Dual Legend Color White A1 Black Black C2 White Red F3White Green H4White Blue K5White Yellow M6Black Gray P7Black Orange R8Black 15 Black (short handle) T9White 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS MOUNTING STYLE Threaded Insert, 2 per pole 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches A 6-32 x 0.195 inches 2 ISO M3 x 5mm B ISO M3 x 5mm (multipole only) Front panel Snap-In, 0.75” wide bezel 5 without Handleguard 6 without Handleguard (multipole only) Front panel Snap-In, 0.96” wide bezel 7 without Handleguard, 1-pole 0.96” wide; multipole units have .105” bezel overhang on all sides 8 without Handleguard, 1-pole 0.96” wide; (multipole only) .105” bezel overhang on all sides BARRIERS no yes no yes no yes no yes CODEAMPERES 2100.100 2850.850 4555.500 2150.150 2900.900 4606.000 2200.200 2950.950 4656.500 2250.250 4101.000 4707.000 2300.300 5121.250 4757.500 2350.350 4151.500 4808.000 2400.400 517 1.750 4858.500 2450.450 4202.000 4909.000 2500.500 5222.250 4959.500 2550.550 5272.750 610 10.000 2600.600 4303.000 71010.500 2650.650 4353.500 611 11.000 2700.700 4404.000 71111.500 2750.750 4454.500 61212.000 2800.800 4505.000 71212.500 OR VOLTAGE COIL (NORMAL RATED VOLTAGE) 6 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 835.000 640 840.000 645 845.000 650 850.000 CODEAMPERES A06 6 DC A12 12 DC A18 18 DC A24 24 DC 16 A32 32 DC A48 48 DC A65 65 DC J06 6 AC J12 J18 J24 J48 12 AC 18 AC 24 AC 48 AC J65 65 AC K20 120 AC L40 240 AC 11 AGENCY APPROVAL P TUV Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted Q UL Recognized STD 1077, UL Recognized 1500 (ignition protected), & CSA Accepted Notes: 1 Actuator Code: A: Handle tie pin spacer(s) and retainers provided unassembled with multi-pole units. S: Handle moves to mid-position only upon electrical trip of the breaker. Available with circuit codes B, C, D, E, and H. T: Handle moves to mid-position and alarm switch activates only upon electrical trip of the breaker. Available with circuit codes B & C. 2 Switch Only circuits, rated up to 50 amps and 6 poles, and only available when tied to a protected pole (Circuit Code B, C, D or H.), For .01 to 30 amps, select Current Code 630. For 35 - 50 amps, select Current Code 650. 3 Available with terminal Codes 1, 2 and 3. Current Rating limited to 30 amps maximum. 4 Consult factory for available Dual Coil options, as special catalog number is required. With Shunt construction, Dual Coils will trip instantaneously on line voltage. Dual coils require 30VA minimum power to trip and are rated for intermittent duty only. 5 On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 6 Separate pole type voltage coils not rated for continuous duty. Available only with delay codes 10, 20 & 30. 7 Available with Circuit Codes B & D only. VDE Certified to 30 amps. UL Recognized, CSA Accepted & TUV Certified to 50 amps. 8 Available up to two poles with AC or DC delays. 9 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. Ratings over 30 amps are only available with Terminal Codes 5, 9, G and H. 10 Terminal Code 1: TUV Certification up to 30 amps, but not recommended over 20 amps. 11 Terminal Codes 3, 5 , 7, 9, E, G and H (Bus Type) are supplied with Lock Washers. These breakers are only TUV Certified when the washers are used. 12 Single pole only. www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker UL489A – Ordering Scheme A F 1 1 Series 2 Actuator 3 Poles B 0 4 Circuit 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 14 6 Frequency & Delay 1 SERIES A 2 ACTUATOR 1 Two Color Visi-Rocker C Indicate ON, vertical legend D Indicate ON, horizontal legend F Indicate OFF, vertical legend G Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Single color J Vertical legend K Horizontal legend Push-To-Reset, Visi-Rocker N Indicate OFF, vertical legend O Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Push-To-Reset , Single color R Vertical legend U Horizontal legend 450 7 Current Rating 1 3 1 8 Terminal 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers M T 11 Max. Appl. Rating 12 Agency Approval 8 TERMINAL 5 1 6 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs & 30° bend 7 3 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) B Screw M5 with upturned lugs 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs F Screw M5 with upturned lugs 5 7 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs G Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend & 30° bend H Screw M5 (Bus Type) 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) M 7 M6 Threaded Stud & 30° bend P 8 Printed Circuit Board Terminals 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs Q 9 Push-In Stud & 30° bend 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND Actuator or Marking: Marking Color Visi-Color 10 ON-OFFDual 10 Single Color Visi-Rocker White B1Black White Black D2Whiten/a Red G3WhiteRed Green J4WhiteGreen Blue L5WhiteBlue Yellow N6Black Yellow Gray Q7Black Gray Orange S8Black Orange 3 POLES 2 1 One 2 Two 3 Three 4 CIRCUIT B Series Trip (Current) 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 2 7 0 without Aux Switch 1 S.P.D.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. 8 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 9 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long S.P.S.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 52 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 54 DC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 56 DC, Long, Hi-Inrush CODEAMPERES 2850.850 2900.900 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 4151.500 517 1.750 4202.000 5222.250 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 www.carlingtech.com 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING M 80 DC 12 AGENCY APPROVAL T UL489A Listed K UL489A Listed, VDE Certified J UL489A Listed, TUV Certified 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 2100.100 2150.150 2200.200 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS 11 STANDARD ROCKER BEZEL BARRIERS Threaded Insert, 2 per pole 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches no A 6-32 X 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only) yes 2 ISO M3 x 5mm no B ISO M3 x 5mm (multi-pole units only) yes ROCKERGUARD & PUSH-TO-RESET BEZEL Threaded Insert, 2 per pole 3 6-32 x 0.195 inches no C 6-32 x 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only) yes 4 ISO M3 x 5mm no D ISO M3 x 5mm (multi-pole units only) yes FRONT PANEL SNAP-IN BRACKET, 0.744” [18.90mm] wide bezel 8 without Rockerguard (single pole units only) no H with Rockerguard (single pole units only) no FRONT PANEL SNAP-IN BRACKET, 0.96” [24.48mm] wide bezel 9 without Rockerguard (single pole units only) no J with Rockerguard (single pole units only) no 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 610 10.000 71010.500 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 435.000 640 440.000 645 445.000 650 450.000 Notes: 1 Push-To-Reset actuators have OFF portion of rocker shrouded. 2 Multi-pole breakers have all breakers identical except when specifying Auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles, and have one rocker per breaker. 3 Auxiliary Switch breakers with Series Trip circuits: ≤ 30A, are supplied with standard half shells. 30-50A are supplied with extended boat (B-Style) half shells. 4 VDE Certification available with single pole breakers only. UL489A Listing available with one and two pole breakers. 5 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. Ratings over 30 amps are only available with Terminal Codes 5, 9, G, H, M and Q. 6 Terminal Code 1 (Push-On) available up to 25 amps with TUV or VDE Certification and 30 amps with UL489A Listing, but is not recommended over 20 amps. 7 Terminal Codes 3, 5 and H (Bus Type) with TUV or VDE, are supplied with Lock Washers, and Terminal Code M (M6 Threaded Stud) with VDE is supplied with Lock and Flat Washers. These breakers are only TUV or VDE Certified when the washers are used. 8 Single pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 30 amps with VDE Certification and 50 amps with UL489A Listing. 9 Terminal Code Q not available with VDE certification. 10 Color shown is Visi and Legend with remainder of rocker black. Dual = ON-OFF/I-O legend. 11 Legend on Push-to-reset bezel/shroud is white with single color actuator codes R & U. Legend on Push-To-Reset bezel/shroud matches Visi-Color of rocker with actuator codes N & O. Rockerguard available with actuator codes C through K 17 A-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Circuit & Terminal Diagrams Circuit & Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 3 Alarm Switch available with .110 x .020 Q.C. & Solder Lug Terminals Only. 18 www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Circuit & Terminal Diagrams Circuit & Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 3 Alarm Switch available with .110 x .020 QC & solder lug terminals only. www.carlingtech.com 19 A-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ± 0.20 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 3 For agency code P = .150 [3.81]. 20 www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Front Panel Snap-In Mounting Style 5 - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Recommended panel thickness: .040 [1.02] to .100 [2.54]. 3 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 21 A-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Front Panel Snap-In Mounting Style 7 - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Recommended panel thickness: .040 [1.02] to .100 [2.54]. 3 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 22 www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - Sealed Toggle UL Recognized – Ordering Scheme A M 1 1 Series 2 Actuator 3 Poles B 0 4 Circuit 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 10 450 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 1 SERIES A 2 ACTUATOR 1 M Sealed Toggle, one per unit 3 POLES 1 One 2 Two 3 Three 4 CIRCUIT A 2 Switch Only (No Coil) F 3 B Series Trip (Current) G 3 C Series Trip (Voltage) H 3,4 D 3 Shunt Trip (Current) E 3 Shunt Trip (Voltage) K 3,4 Relay Trip (Current) Relay Trip (Voltage) Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Voltage Coil Dual Coil with Relay Trip Voltage Coil 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 5 5 0 without Aux Switch 1 S.P.D.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. 7 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 8 (Gold Contacts) 9 S.P.S.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 DC Instantaneous 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 50/60Hz Instantaneous 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 30 DC, 50/60Hz Instantaneous 31 DC, 50/60Hz Ultra Short 32 DC, 50/60Hz Short 34 DC, 50/60Hz Medium 36 DC, 50/60Hz Long 42 7 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 44 7 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 46 7 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush 52 7 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 54 7 DC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 56 7 DC, Long, Hi-Inrush 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) CODEAMPERES 0200.020 0250.025 0300.030 0350.035 0400.040 0450.045 0500.050 0550.055 0600.060 0650.065 0700.070 0750.075 0800.080 0850.085 0900.090 0950.095 2100.100 2150.150 2200.200 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 2850.850 2900.900 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 4151.500 517 1.750 4202.000 5222.250 425 2.500 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 610 10.000 71010.500 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 835.000 640 840.000 645 845.000 650 850.000 1 0 1 8 Terminal 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers C 11 Agency Approval 8 TERMINAL 9 1 10 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) E Screw M4 (Bus Type) 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs F Screw M5 with upturned lugs 3 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs G Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 5 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) H Screw M5 (Bus Type) 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs L 12 0.250 Q.C./ Solder Lug & 30° bend M M6 Threaded Stud 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) Q Push-In Stud & 30° bend R Screw M4 with upturned lugs 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs & 30° bend & 30° bend T Screw M4 (Bus Type) 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend & 30° bend P 12 Printed Circuit Board Terminals B Screw M5 with upturned lugs S Push-On 0.110 Tab (Q.C.) C Screw M4 with upturned lugs 9 LEGEND PLATE 0 No legend plate 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS MOUNTING STYLEBARRIERS 1 Standard Hex Nut no A Standard Hex Nut (multipole only) yes 11 AGENCY APPROVAL C UL Recognized & CSA Accepted I UL Recognized STD 1077, UL Recognized 1500 (ignition protected), & CSA Accepted Notes: 1 Actuator Code M: Handle location as viewed from front of panel: 2 pole - right pole 3 pole - center pole 2 Switch Only circuits, rated up to 50 amps and 3 poles. Only available when tied to a protected pole. For .02 to 30 amps, select Current Code 630. For 35 - 50 amps, select Current Code 650. 3 Available with terminal Codes 1, 2 and 3. Current Rating limited to 30 amps maximum. 4 Consult factory for available Dual Coil options, as special catalog number is required. With Shunt construction, Dual Coils will trip instantaneously on line voltage. Dual coils require 30VA minimum power to trip and are rated for intermittent duty only. 5 Auxiliary Switch available on Series Trip & Switch Only circuits, limited to 30 amps. On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 6 Voltage coils not rated for continuous duty. Available only with delay codes 10 and 20. 7 Available with Circuit Codes B & D only. VDE Certified to 30 amps. UL Recognized, CSA Accepted & TUV Certified to 50 amps. 8 UL Recognition and CSA Certification available on one and two pole breakers. 9 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. Ratings over 30 amps are only available with Terminal Codes 5, 9, B, F, G, H, M and Q. 10 Terminal Code 1: UL Recognition and CSA Certification up to 30 amps, but not recommended over 20 amps. 11 Terminal Code L : available up to 30A. 12 Single pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 50 amps, with Circuit Codes A, B and C. Two pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 40 amps with Circuit Codes A, B and C. OR VOLTAGE COIL (NORMAL RATED VOLTAGE) 6 CODEAMPERES A06 6 DC A12 12 DC A18 18 DC A24 24 DC A32 32 DC A48 48 DC A65 65 DC J06 6 AC www.carlingtech.com J12 J18 J24 J48 12 AC 18 AC 24 AC 48 AC J65 65 AC K20 120 AC L40 240 AC 23 A-Series Circuit Breaker - Sealed Toggle - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 24 www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker UL Recognized – Ordering Scheme A F 1 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 24 630 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 2 3 1 8 Terminal 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers D 11 Agency Approval 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 1 SERIES A CODEAMPERES 0200.020 2250.250 4202.000 0250.025 2300.300 5222.250 0300.030 2350.350 5272.750 0350.035 2400.400 4303.000 0400.040 2450.450 4353.500 0450.045 2500.500 4404.000 0500.050 2550.550 4454.500 0550.055 2600.600 4505.000 0600.060 2650.650 4555.500 0650.065 2700.700 4606.000 0700.070 2750.750 4656.500 0750.075 2800.800 4707.000 0800.080 2850.850 4757.500 0850.085 2900.900 4808.000 0900.090 2950.950 4858.500 0950.095 4101.000 4909.000 2100.100 5121.250 4959.500 2150.150 4151.500 610 10.000 2200.200 517 1.750 71010.500 OR VOLTAGE COIL (NORMAL RATED VOLTAGE) 8 2 ACTUATOR 1 Two Color Visi-Rocker C Indicate ON, vertical legend D Indicate ON, horizontal legend F Indicate OFF, vertical legend G Indicate OFF, horizontal legend H Indicate OFF, no legend Push-To-Reset, Visi-Rocker N Indicate OFF, vertical legend O Indicate OFF, horizontal legend P Indicate OFF, no legend Single color J Vertical legend K Horizontal legend L No legend Push-To-Reset , Single color R Vertical legend U Horizontal legend V No legend 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 835.000 640 840.000 645 845.000 650 850.000 CODEAMPERES 3 POLES 1 One 2 Two 3 Three 4 CIRCUIT F 4 A 3 Switch Only (No Coil) G 4 B Series Trip (Current) H 4,5 C Series Trip (Voltage) 4 D Shunt Trip (Current) K 4,5 E 4 Shunt Trip (Voltage) Relay Trip (Current) Relay Trip (Voltage) Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Voltage Coil Dual Coil with Relay Trip Voltage Coil 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 6,7 5 0 without Aux Switch 1 S.P.D.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. 7 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 8 (Gold Contacts) 9 S.P.S.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 DC Instantaneous 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 50/60Hz Instantaneous 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 30 DC, 50/60Hz Instantaneous 31 DC, 50/60Hz Ultra Short 32 DC, 50/60Hz Short 34 DC, 50/60Hz Medium 36 DC, 50/60Hz Long 42 9 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 44 9 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 46 9 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush 52 9 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 54 9 DC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 56 9 DC, Long, Hi-Inrush Notes: 1 Push-To-Reset actuators have OFF portion of rocker shrouded. 2 Multi-pole breakers have all breakers identical except when specifying Auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles, and have one rocker per breaker. 3 Switch Only circuits, rated up to 50 amps & 3 poles, are available only when tied to a protected pole (Circuit Code B, C, D or H.), For .02 to 30 amps, select Current Code 630. For 35 - 50 amps, select Current Code 650. 4 Available with terminal Codes 1, 2 and 3. Current Rating limited to 30 amps maximum. 5 Consult factory for Dual Coil options, as special catalog number is required. With Shunt construction, Dual Coils will trip instantaneously on line voltage. Dual coils require 30VA minimum power to trip and are rated for intermittent duty only. 6 Auxiliary Switch breakers with Series Trip & Switch Only circuits: ≤ 30A, are supplied with standard half shells. 30-50A are supplied with extended boat (B-Style) half shells. 7 On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 8 Separate pole type voltage coils not rated for continuous duty. Available only with delay codes 10 & 20. 9 Available with Circuit Codes B & D only. VDE Certified to 30 amps. UL Recognized, CSA Accepted & TUV Certified to 50 amps. 10 Series Trip current ratings: VDE Certification available with single pole breakers with DC Delay only. UL Recognition & CSA Accepted available in one and two pole breakers. 11 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. Ratings over 30 amps are only available with Terminal Codes 5, 9, G, H, M and Q. 12 Terminal Code 1: VDE Certification up to 25 amps and UL Recognition and CSA Accepted up to 30 amps, but not recommended over 20 amps. 13 Terminal Codes 3, 5 E & H (Bus Type) with VDE, are supplied with Lock Washers; Terminal Code M (M6 Threaded Stud) with VDE is supplied with Lock and Flat Washers. These breakers are only VDE Certified when the washers are used. 14 VDE Cert. available up to 12 amps. UL Rec. & CSA Accepted available up to 30 amps. 15 Single pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 30 amps with VDE Certification and 50 amps with UL Recognition and CSA Accepted, with Circuit Codes A, B & C. Two pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 40 amps with UL Recognition and CSA Certification with Circuit Codes A, B and C. 16 Terminal Code Q not available with VDE. 17 Terminal Code S used on voltage coil circuit constructions only. 18 Color shown is visi and legend with remainder of rocker black. 19 Dual = ON-OFF/I-O legend with actuator. None = no legend on actuator 20 Legend on Push-to-reset bezel/shroud is white with single color actuator codes R, & U. Legend on Push-to-reset bezel/shroud matches Visi-color of rocker with actuator codes N & O. Rockerguard available with actuator codes C through L. www.carlingtech.com A06 6 DC A12 12 DC A18 18 DC A24 24 DC A32 32 DC A48 48 DC A65 65 DC J06 6 AC J12 J18 J24 J48 12 AC 18 AC 24 AC 48 AC J65 65 AC K20 120 AC L40 240 AC 8 TERMINAL 11 1 12 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) E 13 Screw M4 (Bus Type) 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs F Screw M5 with upturned lugs 3 13 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs G Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 13 13 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) H Screw M5 (Bus Type) 5 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs L 14 0.250 Q.C./ Solder Lug & 30° bend M 13M6 Threaded Stud 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) P 15 Printed Circuit Board Terminals & 30° bend Q 16Push-In Stud 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs R Screw M4 with upturned lugs & 30° bend & 30° bend 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) S 17 Push-On 0.110 Tab (Q.C.) & 30° bend & 30° bend B Screw M5 with upturned lugs T Screw M4 (Bus Type) C Screw M4 with upturned lugs & 30° bend 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND Actuator or Marking: Marking Color Visi-Color 12 ON-OFFDual 12 Single Color Visi-Rocker White B1Black White Black D2Whiten/a Red G3WhiteRed Green J4WhiteGreen Blue L5WhiteBlue Yellow N6Black Yellow Gray Q7Black Gray Orange S8Black Orange 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS 20 STANDARD ROCKER BEZEL BARRIERS Threaded Insert, 2 per pole 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches no A 6-32 X 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only) yes 2 ISO M3 x 5mm no B ISO M3 x 5mm (multi-pole units only) yes ROCKERGUARD & PUSH-TO-RESET BEZEL Threaded Insert, 2 per pole 3 6-32 x 0.195 inches no C 6-32 x 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only) yes 4 ISO M3 x 5mm no D ISO M3 x 5mm (multi-pole units only) yes FRONT PANEL SNAP-IN BRACKET, 0.744” [18.90mm] wide bezel 8 without Rockerguard (single pole units only) no H with Rockerguard (single pole units only) no FRONT PANEL SNAP-IN BRACKET, 0.96” [24.48mm] wide bezel 9 without Rockerguard (single pole units only) no J with Rockerguard (single pole units only) no 11 AGENCY APPROVAL C UL Recognized & CSA Accepted D VDE Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted E TUV Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted I UL Recognized STD 1077, UL Recognized 1500 (ignition protected), & CSA Accepted 25 A-Series Circuit Breaker - Flat Rocker UL Recognized – Ordering Scheme A 1 1 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 24 630 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 2 ACTUATOR 1 Two Color Visi-Rocker 1 Indicate OFF, vertical legend 2 Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Single color 3 Vertical legend 4 Horizontal legend Push-To-Reset, Visi-Rocker 5 Indicate OFF, vertical legend 6 Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Push-To-Reset , Single color 7 Vertical legend 8 Horizontal legend 2 Two 3 Three 4 CIRCUIT F 4 A 3 Switch Only (No Coil) G 4 B Series Trip (Current) H 4,5 C Series Trip (Voltage) 4 D Shunt Trip (Current) K 4,5 E 4 Shunt Trip (Voltage) Relay Trip (Current) Relay Trip (Voltage) Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Voltage Coil Dual Coil with Relay Trip Voltage Coil 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 6,7 5 0 without Aux Switch 1 S.P.D.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. 7 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 8 (Gold Contacts) 9 S.P.S.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 6 DC Instantaneous 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 6 50/60Hz Instantaneous 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 30 DC, 50/60Hz Instantaneous 31 DC, 50/60Hz Ultra Short 32 DC, 50/60Hz Short 34 DC, 50/60Hz Medium 36 DC, 50/60Hz Long 42 9 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 44 9 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 46 9 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush 52 9 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 54 9 DC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 56 DC, Long, Hi-Inrush 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) CODEAMPERES 0200.020 2250.250 4202.000 0250.025 2300.300 5222.250 0300.030 2350.350 5272.750 0350.035 2400.400 4303.000 0400.040 2450.450 4353.500 0450.045 2500.500 4404.000 0500.050 2550.550 4454.500 0550.055 2600.600 4505.000 0600.060 2650.650 4555.500 0650.065 2700.700 4606.000 0700.070 2750.750 4656.500 0750.075 2800.800 4707.000 0800.080 2850.850 4757.500 0850.085 2900.900 4808.000 0900.090 2950.950 4858.500 0950.095 4101.000 4909.000 2100.100 5121.250 4959.500 2150.150 4151.500 610 10.000 2200.200 517 1.750 71010.500 OR VOLTAGE COIL (NORMAL RATED VOLTAGE) 8 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 835.000 640 840.000 645 845.000 650 850.000 CODEAMPERES A06 6 DC A12 12 DC A18 18 DC A24 24 DC 26 A32 32 DC A48 48 DC A65 65 DC J06 6 AC 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers E 11 Agency Approval 8 TERMINAL 11 1 12 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) E 13 Screw M4 (Bus Type) 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs F Screw M5 with upturned lugs 3 13 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs G Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 13 13 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) H Screw M5 (Bus Type) 5 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs L 14 0.250 Q.C./ Solder Lug & 30° bend M 13M6 Threaded Stud 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) P 15 Printed Circuit Board Terminals & 30° bend Q Push-In Stud 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs R Screw M4 with upturned lugs & 30° bend & 30° bend 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) S 16 Push-On 0.110 Tab (Q.C.) & 30° bend & 30° bend B Screw M5 with upturned lugs T Screw M4 (Bus Type) C Screw M4 with upturned lugs & 30° bend 1 SERIES A 3 POLES 2 1 One 2 3 1 8 Terminal J12 J18 J24 J48 12 AC 18 AC 24 AC 48 AC J65 65 AC K20 120 AC L40 240 AC 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND Actuator or Marking: Marking Color Visi-Color 17 ON-OFFDual 17 Single Color Visi-Rocker White B1Black White Black D2Whiten/a Red G3WhiteRed Green J4WhiteGreen Blue L5WhiteBlue Yellow N6Black Yellow Gray Q7Black Gray Orange S8Black Orange 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS 18 STANDARD ROCKER BEZEL BARRIERS Threaded Insert, 2 per pole FLAT ROCKER ACTUATOR 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches no A 6-32 X 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only) yes 2 ISO M3 x 5mm no B ISO M3 x 5mm (multi-pole units only) yes 19 RECESSED OFF SIDE ROCKER ACTUATOR 5 6-32 x 0.195 inches no E 6-32 x 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only) yes 6 ISO M3 x 5mm no F ISO M3 x 5mm (multi-pole units only) yes PUSH-TO-RESET BEZEL,Threaded Insert, 2 per pole 3 6-32 x 0.195 inches no C 6-32 x 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only) yes 4 ISO M3 x 5mm no D ISO M3 x 5mm (multi-pole units only) yes 11 AGENCY APPROVAL C UL Recognized & CSA Accepted E TUV Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted I UL Recognized STD 1077, UL Recognized 1500 (ignition protected), & CSA Accepted Notes: 1 Push-To-Reset actuators have OFF portion of rocker shrouded. 2 Multi-pole breakers have all breakers identical except when specifying Auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles, and have one rocker per breaker. 3 Switch Only circuits, rated up to 50 amps & 3 poles. Only available when tied to a protected pole. For .02 to 30 amps, select Current Code 630. For 35 - 50 amps, select Current Code 650. 4 Available with terminal Codes 1, 2 and 3. Current Rating limited to 30 amps maximum. 5 Consult factory for Dual Coil options, as special catalog number is required. With Shunt construction, Dual Coils will trip instantaneously on line voltage. Dual coils require 30VA minimum power to trip and are rated for intermittent duty only. 6 Auxiliary Switch breakers with Series Trip & Switch Only circuits: ≤ 30A, are supplied with standard half shells. 30-50A are supplied with extended boat (B-Style) half shells. 7 On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 8 Separate pole type voltage coils not rated for continuous duty. Available only with delay codes 10 & 20. 9 Available with Circuit Codes B & D only. UL Recognized, CSA Accepted & TUV Certified to 50 amps. 10 UL Recognition, CSA Acceptance & TUV Certification available in one and two pole breakers. 11 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. Ratings over 30 amps are only available with Terminal Codes 5, 9, G, H, M and Q. 12 Terminal Code 1: Available up to 30 amps, but not recommended over 20 amps. 13 Terminal Codes 3, 5 E & H (Bus Type) with TUV, are supplied with Lock Washers; Terminal Code M (M6 Threaded Stud) with TUV is supplied with Lock and Flat Washers. These breakers are only TUV Certified when the washers are used. 14 TUV Cert. available up to 12 amps. UL Rec. & CSA Accepted available up to 30 amps. 15 Single pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 50 amps with UL Recognition, CSA Accepted & TUV Certification, with Circuit Codes A, B and C. Two pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 40 amps with UL Recognition and CSA Accepted with Circuit Codes A, B and C. 16 Terminal Code S used on voltage coil circuit constructions only. 17 Color shown is visi and legend with remainder of rocker black, Dual = ON-OFF/I-O legend. 18 Legend on Push-to-reset bezel/shroud is white with single color actuator codes 7 & 8. Legend on Push-To-Reset bezel/shroud matches Visi-Color of rocker with actuator codes 5 & 6. 19 Recessed “off-side” available with actuator codes 1, 2, 3 & 4. Legends on rocker are available in ink stamping only. www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - Flat Rocker UL 489A – Ordering Scheme A 1 1 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 14 630 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 2 ACTUATOR 1 Two Color Visi-Rocker 1 Indicate OFF, vertical legend 2 Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Single color 3 Vertical legend 4 Horizontal legend Push-To-Reset, Visi-Rocker 5 Indicate OFF, vertical legend 6 Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Push-To-Reset , Single color 7 Vertical legend 8 Horizontal legend 2 Two 3 Three 4 CIRCUIT B Series Trip (Current) 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 3 7 0 without Aux Switch 1 S.P.D.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. 8 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 9 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long S.P.S.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 52 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 54 DC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 56 DC, Long, Hi-Inrush 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) CODEAMPERES 0200.020 0250.025 0300.030 0350.035 0400.040 0450.045 0500.050 0550.055 0600.060 0650.065 0700.070 0750.075 0800.080 0850.085 0900.090 0950.095 2100.100 2150.150 2200.200 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 2850.850 2900.900 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 4151.500 517 1.750 www.carlingtech.com 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers M T 11 Max. Appl. Rating 12 Agency Approval 8 TERMINAL 5 1 6 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs & 30° bend 3 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) B Screw M5 with upturned lugs 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs F Screw M5 with upturned lugs 5 7 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs G Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend & 30° bend H Screw M5 (Bus Type) 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) M 7 M6 Threaded Stud & 30° bend P 8 Printed Circuit Board Terminals 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs Q 9 Push-In Stud & 30° bend 1 SERIES A 3 POLES 2 1 One 2 3 1 8 Terminal 4202.000 5222.250 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 610 10.000 71010.500 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 435.000 640 440.000 645 445.000 650 450.000 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND Actuator or Marking: Marking Color Visi-Color 11 ON-OFFDual 11 Single Color Visi-Rocker White B1Black White Black D2Whiten/a Red G3WhiteRed Green J4WhiteGreen Blue L5WhiteBlue Yellow N6Black Yellow Gray Q7Black Gray Orange S8Black Orange 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS 12 STANDARD ROCKER BEZEL BARRIERS Threaded Insert, 2 per pole FLAT ROCKER ACTUATOR 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches no A 6-32 X 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only) yes 2 ISO M3 x 5mm no B ISO M3 x 5mm (multi-pole units only) yes RECESSED OFF SIDE ROCKER ACTUATOR 5 6-32 x 0.195 inches no E 6-32 x 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only) yes 6 ISO M3 x 5mm no F ISO M3 x 5mm (multi-pole units only) yes PUSH-TO-RESET BEZEL,Threaded Insert, 2 per pole 3 6-32 x 0.195 inches no C 6-32 x 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only) yes 4 ISO M3 x 5mm no D ISO M3 x 5mm (multi-pole units only) yes 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING M 80 DC 12 AGENCY APPROVAL T UL489A Listed J UL489A Listed, TUV Certified Notes: 1 Push-To-Reset actuators have OFF portion of rocker shrouded. 2 Multi-pole breakers have all breakers identical except when specifying Auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles, and have one rocker per breaker. 3 Auxiliary Switch breakers with Series Trip circuits: ≤ 30A, are supplied with standard half shells. 30-50A are supplied with extended boat (B-Style) half shells. 4 VDE Certification available with single pole breakers only. UL489A Listing available with one and two pole breakers. 5 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. Ratings over 30 amps are only available with Terminal Codes 5, 9, G, H, M and Q. 6 Terminal Code 1 (Push-On) available up to 25 amps with TUV or VDE Certification and 30 amps with UL489A Listing, but is not recommended over 20 amps. 7 Terminal Codes 3, 5 and H (Bus Type) with TUV or VDE, are supplied with Lock Washers, and Terminal Code M (M6 Threaded Stud) with VDE is supplied with Lock and Flat Washers. These breakers are only TUV or VDE Certified when the washers are used. 8 Single pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 30 amps with VDE Certification and 50 amps with UL489A Listing. 9 Terminal Code Q not available with VDE certification. 10 Color shown is Visi and Legend with remainder of rocker black. Dual = ON-OFF/I-O legend. 11 Legend on Push-to-reset bezel/shroud is white with single color actuator codes R & U. 12 Legend on Push-To-Reset bezel/shroud matches Visi-Color of rocker with actuator codes N & O. Rockerguard available with actuator codes C through K 27 A-Series Circuit Breaker - Recessed Paddle – Ordering Scheme A Y 2 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Auxiliary Switch 24 620 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 1 SERIES A 2 ACTUATOR 1 Y Single Color Recessed Paddle Actuator with Vertical Legends 3 POLES 2 1 One 2 4 CIRCUIT A Switch-Only (No Coil) B Series Trip (Current) C Series Trip (Voltage) D Shunt Trip (Current) E Shunt Trip (Voltage) Two F G H K 3 Three Relay Trip (Current) Relay Trip (Voltage) Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Voltage Coil Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Current Coil 5 AUXILIARY SWITCH 0 without Aux Switch 1 S.P.D.T. with 0.093 Q.C. Terminals 2 S.P.D.T. with 0.110 Q.C. Terminals 3 S.P.D.T. with 0.139 Solder Lug Terminals 4 S.P.D.T. with 0.110 Q.C. Terminals (Gold Contacts) 5 S.P.D.T. with 0.093 Q.C. Terminals (Gold Contacts) 6 S.P.S.T.-N.O. with 0.139 Solder Lug Terminals 7 S.P.S.T.-N.O. with 0.110 Q.C. Terminals (Gold Contacts) 8 S.P.S.T.-N.O. with 0.187 Q.C. Terminals 9 S.P.D.T. with 0.187 Q.C. Terminals 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 3 3 DC, 50/60 Hz Switch Only 10 DC Instantaneous 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 50/60 Hz Instantaneous 21 50/60 Hz Ultra Short 22 24 26 42 44 46 52 54 56 50/60 Hz Short 50/60 Hz Medium 50/60 Hz Long 50/60 Hz Short Hi-Inrush 50/60 Hz Medium Hi-Inrush 50/60 Hz Long Hi-Inrush DC, Short, Hi-Inrush DC, Medium, Hi-Inrush DC, Long, Hi-Inrush 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 4 CODEAMPERES 2200.200 2950.950 4606.000 2250.250 4101.000 4656.500 2300.300 5121.250 4707.000 2350.350 4151.500 4757.500 2400.400 517 1.750 4808.000 2450.450 4202.000 4858.500 2500.500 5222.250 4909.000 2550.550 4252.500 4959.500 2600.600 5272.750 610 10.000 2650.650 4303.000 71010.500 2700.700 4353.500 611 11.000 2750.750 4404.000 71111.500 2800.800 4454.500 61212.000 2850.850 4505.000 71212.500 2900.900 4555.500 61313.000 OR VOLTAGE COIL (NORMAL RATED VOLTAGE) 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 35.000 640 40.000 645 45.000 65050.000 4 2 1 8 Terminal 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers 8 TERMINAL 1 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) C 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs E 3 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) F 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs 5 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) G 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs H & 30° bend L 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) M & 30° bend P 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs Q & 30° bend R 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend S B Screw M5 with upturned lugs T C C 11 Max. Appl. Rating 12 Agency Approval Screw, M4 with upturned lugs Screw, M4 (Bus Type) Screw M5 with upturned lugs & 30° bend Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend Screw M5 (Bus Type) 0.250 Q.C./Solder Lug M6 Threaded Stud Printed Circuit Board Terminals Push-In Stud Screw, M4 with upturned lugs & 30° Bend Screw, M5 with upturned lugs Screw, M4 with upturned lugs 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND 5 Actuator Color I-O ON-OFF Dual Legend Color White A B1 Black Black C D2 White Red F G3White Green H J4White Blue K L5White Yellow M N6Black Gray P Q7Black Orange R S8Black 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches A 6-32 X 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only) 2 ISO M3 x 5mm B ISO M3 x 5mm (multi-pole units only) BARRIERS no yes no yes 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING 6 A 65 VDC C 120/240 VAC (Available only on 2 or 3-Pole units) K 120 VAC M 80 DC 12 AGENCY APPROVAL 7 A Without Approvals C UL Recognized and CSA Accepted T UL 489A Notes: 1 All standard catalog numbers are supplied with Vertical Legends. For Horizontal or other non-standard legends, choose “X” and order as a special catalog number. 2 For rating (T) 2 & 3 Pole not available. 3 Frequency and Time Delay ratings of (03, 20, 21, 22, 24, 26, 42, 44, 46) not available with approval T. 4 Voltage Coil Ratings starting with (J, K, or L) not available with approval T. 5 “OFF and/or “O” Legends are on Bracket and are only visible when the Paddle Actuator is in the off position. 6 Maximum Application Ratings (C & K) not available with approval T. 7 Not all approvals are available in all constructions. Consult factory for details. CODEAMPERES A06 6 DC A12 12 DC A18 18 DC A24 24 DC 28 A32 32 DC A48 48 DC A65 65 DC J06 6 AC J12 J18 J24 J48 12 AC 18 AC 24 AC 48 AC J65 65 AC K20 120 AC L40 240 AC www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker – Circuit & Terminal Diagrams Circuit & Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 3 Schematic shown represents current trip circuit. 4 Circuits shown for >30 amps / VDE. www.carlingtech.com 29 A-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 Dimensions apply to all variations shown. Notice that circuit breaker line & load terminal orientation on indicate OFF is opposite of indicate ON. 2 For pole orientation with horizontal legend, rotate front view clockwise 90°. 3 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 4 Tolerance ± 0.20 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 30 www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker Snap-In Bracket - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 Dimensions apply to all variations shown. Notice that circuit breaker line & load terminal 2 For pole orientation with horizontal legend, rotate front view clockwise 90°. Orientation on indicate “OFF” is opposite of indicate “ON” 3 Recommended panel thickness: .04 0 [1.02] to .100 [2.54] 4 All dimensions are in Inches [millimeters]. 5 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 31 A-Series Circuit Breaker - Flat Rocker - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 For pole orientation with horizontal legend, rotate front view clockwise 90°. 3 Tolerance ± 0.20 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 32 www.carlingtech.com A-Series Circuit Breaker - Recessed Paddle - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ± 0.20 [.51] unless otherwise specified www.carlingtech.com 33 A-Series Circuit Breaker - PC Terminal Diagrams PC Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] Notes: 1 Drawing illustrates A-Series with VDE certification. 2 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 3 Tolerance ± 0.20 [.51] unless otherwise specified 34 www.carlingtech.com B-Series B-Series Circuit Breaker - Introduction B-Series CIRCUIT BREAKER Carling Technologies’ B-Series hydraulic magnetic circuit breakers are specifically designed for applications requiring extra insulation and tongue and groove half-shell constructions. The B-Series carries global regulatory safety approvals for spacing requirements and are ideal for use as general purpose as well as full load amp applications. Available with various choices of time delays, terminals, actuator styles, with a wide range of standard colors and imprinting. 1-6 poles; ratings from 0.02 to 50 amps, up to 277VAC or 80VDC; UL recognized, CSA, VDE -0642, TUV, UL-1500, UL489A Listed Product Highlights: Meet CSA Standard 22.2 No. 100 for the Generator & Welder markets Extra insulation and tongue & groove half-shell constructions UL Recognized - UL Standard 508, 1077, 1500 UL Listed - UL Standard 489, 489A CSA Accepted TUV Certified VDE Certified Only Military applicable ordering schemes and drawings are shown in this catalog. For complete product details, please visit www.carlingtech.com www.carlingtech.com 35 B-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Maximum Voltage 277VAC 50/60 Hz, 80VDC Current Ratings Standard current coils: 0.100, 0.250, 0.500, 0.750, 1.00, 2.50, 5.00, 7.50, 10.0, 15.0, 20.0, 25.0, 30.0, 35.0, 40.0 and 50.0 amps. Other ratings available, see ordering scheme. Standard Voltage Coils DC - 6V, 12V; AC - 120V, other ratings available, see ordering scheme. Auxiliary Switch Rating SPDT; 10.1 AMPS - 250VAC,1.0A 65 VDC or 0.5A 80 VDC, 0.1 Amps - 125VAC (with gold contacts). VDE-1.0 Amp - 125VAC. Insulation Resistance Minimum of 100 Megohms at 500 VDC. Dielectric Strength UL, CSA-1500 V 50/60 Hz for one minute between all electrically isolated terminals. B-Series circuit breakers comply with the 8mm spacing and 3750V 50/60 Hz dielectric requirements from hazardous voltage to operator accessible surfaces, between adjacent poles and from main circuits to auxiliary circuits per Publications EN 60950 and VDE 0805. Resistance, Impedance Values from Line to Load Terminal - based on Series Trip Circuit Breaker. RESISTANCE PER POLE VALUES from Line to Load Terminals (Values Based on Series Trip Circuit Breaker) CURRENT TOLERANCE (AMPS) (%) 0.10 - 5.0 5.1 - 20.0 15 25 20.1 - 50.0 35 Pulse Tolerance Curves Mechanical Endurance 10,000 ON-OFF operations @ 6 per minute; with rated Current and Voltage. Trip Free All B-Series Circuit Breakers will trip on overload, even when Handle is forcibly held in the ON position. Trip Indication The operating Handle moves positively to the OFF position when an overload causes the breaker to trip. Physical Number of Poles 1 - 6 poles at 30 Amps or less. 1 and 2 poles at 31 Amps thru 50 Amps. Internal Circuit Config. Series, (with or without auxiliary switch), Shunt and Relay with current or voltage trip coils, Dual Coil, Switch Only (with or without auxiliary switch). Weight Approximately 65 grams/pole. (Approximately 2.32 ounces/pole.) Standard Colors Housing- Black; Actuator - See Ordering Scheme. Environmental Designed and tested in accordance with requirements of specification MIL-PRF-55629 & MIL-STD-202 as follows: Shock Withstands 100 Gs, 6ms, sawtooth while carrying rated current per Method 213, Test Condition “I”. Instantaneous and ultra-short curves tested @ 90% of rated current. Vibration Withstands 0.060” excursion from 10-55 Hz, and 10 Gs 55-500 Hz, at rated current per Method 204C, Test Condition A. Instantaneous and ultrashort curves tested at 90% of rated current. Moisture Resistance Method 106D, i.e., ten 24-hour cycles @ + 25°C to +65°C, 80-98% RH. Salt Spray Method 101, Condition A (90-95% RH @ 5% NaCl Solution, 96 hrs). Thermal Shock Method 107D, Condition A (Five cycles @ -55°C to +25°C to +85°C to +25°C). Operating Temperature -40° C to +85° C *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 36 www.carlingtech.com B-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table A: Lists UL Recognized & CSA Certified configurations and performance capabilities as a Component Supplementary Protector. Notes: 1 Requires branch circuit backup with a UL LISTED Type K5 or RK5 fuse (15A minimum) at no more than 4 times the rating of the protector. 2 Same as note 1, except that backup fuse is limited to 80A maximum. 3 2 pole protector required (with one pole per power line) for: 250/125 VAC, 125/250 VAC and 208Y/120 VAC Power Systems. 1 pole protector required for : 125 VAC, 1Ø Power System. 4 Satisfies the requirements of clause 11.2.8.2.5 of CSA STD C22.2 No 100 for the use of supplementary protectors with portable generators. www.carlingtech.com 37 B-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table B: Lists UL Recognized, CSA, VDE & TUV Certified configurations & performance capabilities as a Component Supplementary Protector. Notes: 1 General Purpose Ratings for UL/CSA Only. 2 Requires branch circuit backup with a UL LISTED Type K5 or RK5 fuse (15A minimum) at no more than 4 times the rating of the protector. 3 Same as note 1, except that backup fuse is limited to 80 A maximum. Table C: Lists UL Recognized, CSA Certified configurations and performance capabilities as Protectors, Supplementary for Marine Electrical and Fuel Systems (CCN/Guide PEQZ2, File E75596). Ignition Protected per UL 1500. UL Classified Small Craft Electrical Devices, Marine in accordance with ISO 8846 (CCN/Guide UZMK, File MQ1515) as Marine Supplementary Protectors. Notes: 1 Available with special catalog number only (consult factory). 2 2 pole protector required (with one pole per power line) for: 250/125 VAC, 125/250 VAC and 208Y/120 VAC Power Systems. 1 pole protector required for : 125 VAC, 1Ø Power System. 38 www.carlingtech.com B-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Table D: Lists UL Listed configurations and performance capabilities as Circuit Breakers for use in Communications Equipment (CCN/ Guide DITT, File E189195), under UL489A Notes: 1 Parallel Pole Construction Table E: Lists UL Listed (489) configuration and performance capabilities as a Molded Case Circuit Breaker. B SERIES TABLE E : UL489 LISTED BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS VOLTAGE CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION MAX. RATING FREQUENCY PHASE SERIES SHUNT TRIP DUAL COIL CURRENT RATING INTERRUPTING CAPACITY (AMPS) FULL LOAD AMPS WITHOUT BACKUP FUSE CONSTRUCTION NOTES 120 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 30 5,000 1 Pole 120 / 240 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 30 5,000 2 Poles 120 / 240 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 30 5,000 2 or 3 Poles (1 Pole of a 3 Pole Unit is for Neutral Break) 120 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 30 5,000 1 Pole 120 / 240 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 30 5,000 2 Poles 120 / 240 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 30 5,000 2 or 3 Poles (1 Pole of a 3 Pole Unit is for Neutral Break) Agency Certifications UL Recognized UL Standard 1077 Component Recognition Program as Protectors Supplementary (Guide CCN/QVNU2, File E75596) CSA Accepted Component Supplementary Protector under Class 3215 30, FIle 047848 0 000 CSA Standard C22.2 No. 235 UL Standard 508 Switches, Industrial Control (Guide CCN/NRNT2, File E148683) TUV Certified EN60934, under License No. R72103448 UL Standard 1500 Protectors, Supplementary for Marine Electrical & Fuel Systems (Guide PEQZ2, File E75596) Ignition Protection VDE Certified EN60934, VDE 0642 under File No. 10537 UL Listed UL Standard 489 UL Standard 489A www.carlingtech.com Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, (Guide DIVQ, File E129899) Communications Equipment (Guide CCN/DITT, File E189195) 39 B-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle UL Recognized – Ordering Scheme B A 3 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 10 450 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 10 Mounting/ Barriers C 11 Agency Approval CODEAMPERES 2 ACTUATOR A Handle, one per pole B Handle, one per multipole unit S Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole T Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole & Alarm Switch 3 4 4 CIRCUIT A 2 Switch Only (No Coil) B Series Trip (Current) C Series Trip (Voltage) 3 D Shunt Trip (Current) E 3 Shunt Trip (Voltage) F 3 Relay Trip (Current) Three Four 5 6 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 2 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 6 DC Instantaneous 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 6 50/60Hz Instantaneous 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long Five Six G 3 Relay Trip (Voltage) H 3,4 Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Voltage Coil K 3,4 Dual Coil with Relay Trip Voltage Coil 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 5 5 0 without Aux Switch 1 S.P.D.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. 7 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 8 (Gold Contacts) 9 S.P.S.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 30 DC, 50/60Hz Instantaneous 31 DC, 50/60Hz Ultra Short 32 DC, 50/60Hz Short 34 DC, 50/60Hz Medium 36 DC, 50/60Hz Long 42 7 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 44 7 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 46 7 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush 52 7 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 54 7 DC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 56 7 DC, Long, Hi-Inrush Notes: 1 Actuator Code: A: Handle tie pin spacer(s) and retainers provided unassembled with multi-pole units. B: Handle location as viewed from front of breaker: 2 pole - left pole 3 pole - center pole 4 pole - two handles at center poles 5 pole - three handles at center poles 6 pole - four handles at center poles S: Handle moves to mid-position only upon electrical trip of the breaker. Available with circuit codes B, C, D, E, F, G, H and K. T: Handle moves to mid-position and alarm switch activates only upon electrical trip of the breaker. Available with circuit codes B & C. 2 Switch Only circuits, rated up to 50 amps and 6 poles, and only available with VDE Certification when tied to a protected pole (Circuit Code B, C, D or H.), For .02 to 30 amps, select Current Code 630. For 35 - 50 amps, select Current Code 650. 3 Available with Terminal Codes 1, 2 and 3. Current Rating limited to 30 amps maximum. 4 Consult factory for available Dual Coil options, as special catalog number is required. With Shunt construction, Dual Coils will trip instantaneously on line voltage. Dual coils require 30VA minimum power to trip and are rated for intermittent duty only. 5 Auxiliary Switch breakers with Series Trip and Switch Only circuits. On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 6 Separate pole type voltage coils not rated for continuous duty. Available only with delay codes 10 and 20. 7 Available with Circuit Codes B & D only. VDE Certified to 30 amps. UL Recognized and CSA Accepted to 50 amps. 8 VDE Certification available with single pole breakers with DC Delay only. UL Recognition and CSA Accepted available in one and two pole breakers. 9 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. Ratings over 30 amps are only available with Terminal Codes 5, 9, G, H, J, K, M and Q. 10 VDE Certification up to 25 amps and UL Recognition and CSA Acceptance up to 30 amps, but not recommended over 20 amps. 11 Terminal Codes 3, 5 E and H (Bus Type) with VDE, are supplied with Lock Washers, and Terminal Code M (M6 Threaded Stud) with VDE is supplied with Lock and Flat Washers. These breakers are only VDE Certified when the washers are used. 12 VDE Cert. available up to 12 amps. UL Rec. & CSA Acceptance available up to 30 amps. 13 Single pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 30 amps with VDE Certification and 50 amps with UL Recognition and CSA Acceptance, with Circuit Codes A, B and C. Two pole breakers with Terminal Code P (Printed Circuit Board) are available up to 40 amps with UL Recognition and CSA Acceptance with Circuit Codes A, B and C. 14 Available with Actuator Codes A, S and T. 15 Available with voltage coils only. 16 Terminal Code Q not available with VDE approvals. 40 9 Actuator Color 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 1 SERIES B 3 POLES 1 One 2 Two 1 B 1 8 Terminal 0200.020 2250.250 4202.000 0250.025 2300.300 5222.250 0300.030 2350.350 5272.750 0350.035 2400.400 4303.000 0400.040 2450.450 4353.500 0450.045 2500.500 4404.000 0500.050 2550.550 4454.500 0550.055 2600.600 4505.000 0600.060 2650.650 4555.500 0650.065 2700.700 4606.000 0700.070 2750.750 4656.500 0750.075 2800.800 4707.000 0800.080 2850.850 4757.500 0850.085 2900.900 4808.000 0900.090 2950.950 4858.500 0950.095 4101.000 4909.000 2100.100 5121.250 4959.500 2150.150 4151.500 610 10.000 2200.200 517 1.750 71010.500 OR VOLTAGE COIL (NORMAL RATED VOLTAGE) 6 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 835.000 640 840.000 645 845.000 650 850.000 A06 6 DC A12 12 DC A18 18 DC A24 24 DC J65 65 AC K20 120 AC L40 240 AC CODEAMPERES A32 32 DC A48 48 DC A65 65 DC J06 6 AC J12 J18 J24 J48 12 AC 18 AC 24 AC 48 AC 8 TERMINAL 9 F Screw M5 with upturned lugs 1 10 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) & 30° bend 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs G Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend 3 11 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) H Screw M5 (Bus Type) 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs J Screw M5 Back Connect K Screw 10-32 Back Connect 5 11 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs L 12 0.250 Q.C./ Solder Lug & 30° bend M 11 M6 Threaded Stud 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) N Screw M4 Back Connect & 30° bend P 13 Printed Circuit Board Terminals 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs Q 16 Push-In Stud & 30° bend R Screw M4 with upturned lugs 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend & 30° bend S 15 Push-On 0.110 Tab (Q.C.) B Screw M5 with upturned lugs & 30° bend C Screw M4 with upturned lugs T Screw M4 (Bus Type) & 30° bend E 11 Screw M4 (Bus Type) Y Screw 8-32 Back Connect 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND Actuator Color I-O ON-OFF White AB Black CD Red FG Green HJ Blue KL Yellow MN Gray PQ Orange RS Dual Legend Color 1Black 2White 3White 4White 5White 6Black 7Black 8Black 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS MOUNTING STYLE BARRIERS Threaded Insert, 2 per pole 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches no A 6-32 x 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only)yes 2 ISO M3 x 5mm no B ISO M3 x 5mm yes Rectangular Adapter Plate with mounting centers of 2.062 inches [52.37mm] and Threaded insert, 2 per pole 3 14 6-32 x 0.225 inches no C 14 6-32 X 0.225 inches (multi-pole units only)yes 14 4 ISO M3 x 6.5mm no D 14 ISO M3 x 6.5mm yes Front panel Snap-In, 0.75” [19.05mm] wide bezel 5 without Handleguard no 6 without Handleguard (multipole only) yes Front panel Snap-In, 0.96” wide bezel 7 without Handleguard, 1-pole 0.96” wide; no multipole units have .105” bezel overhang on all sides 8 without Handleguard, 1-pole 0.96” wide; yes (multipole only) .105” bezel overhang on all sides 11 AGENCY APPROVAL C UL Recognized & CSA Accepted D VDE Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted E TUV Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted I UL Recognized STD 1077, UL Recognized 1500 (ignition protected), & CSA Accepted www.carlingtech.com B-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle UL489 Listed – Ordering Scheme B A 1 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 24 450 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 2 ACTUATOR 1 A Handle, one per pole B Handle, one per multipole unit S Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole T Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole & Alarm Switch 2 3 3 Three Two 4 CIRCUIT B Series Trip (Current) 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 4 0 without Aux Switch 1 S.P.D.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 3 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Solder Lug 8 S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 9 S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 21 AC Ultra Short 22 AC Short 24 AC Medium 26 AC Long 8 Terminal 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers K G 11 Max. Appl. Rating 12 Agency Approval 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND 6 Actuator Color ON-OFF Dual Legend Color White B1 Black Black D2 White Red G3White Green J4White Blue L5White Yellow N6Black Gray Q7Black Orange S8Black 1 SERIES B 3 POLES 2 1 One 1 B A 42 AC, Short,Hi-Inrush 44 AC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 46 AC, Long, Hi-Inrush 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS MOUNTING STYLE BARRIERS Threaded Insert, 2 per pole A 6-32 x 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only)yes B ISO M3 x 5mm yes Rectangular Adapter Plate with mounting centers of 2.062 inches [52.37mm] and Threaded insert, 2 per pole 7 C 6-32 X 0.225 inches (multi-pole units only)yes D ISO M3 x 6.5mm yes Front panel Snap-In, 0.75” [19.05mm] wide bezel 6 without Handleguard (multipole only) yes Front panel Snap-In, 0.96” wide bezel 8 without Handleguard, 1-pole 0.96” wide; yes (multipole only) .105” bezel overhang on all sides 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING C 8120/240VAC K120VAC 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) CODEAMPERES 2100.100 2150.150 2200.200 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 2850.850 2900.900 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 4151.500 517 1.750 4202.000 5222.250 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 610 10.000 71010.500 611 11.000 A 8 TERMINAL 4 1 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs B 3 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs F 5 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs G & 30° bend H 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) J & 30° bend K 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs M & 30° bend N 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) Q & 30° bend Y www.carlingtech.com 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 Load Terminal #8 Screw with QC Combination (Special Catalog #) Screw M5 with upturned lugs & 30° bend Screw M5 with upturned lugs & 30° bend Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend Screw M5 (Bus Type) Screw M5 Back Connect Screw 10-32 Back Connect M6 Threaded Stud Screw M4 Back Connect Push-In Stud Screw 8-32 Back Connect 12 AGENCY APPROVAL G UL489 Listed 3 UL489 Listed, TUV Certified Notes: 1 Actuator Code: A: Handle tie pin spacer(s) and retainers provided un-assembled with multi-pole units. B: Handle location as viewed from front of breaker: 2 pole - left pole 3 pole - center pole S: Handle moves to mid-position only upon electrical trip of the breaker. Available with circuit codes B, C, D, E, F, G, H and K. T: Handle moves to mid-position and alarm switch activates only upon electrical trip of the breaker. Available with circuit codes B & C. 2 All poles must be same polarity. 3 3 pole units available only when 1 of 3 poles is neutral. 4 Auxiliary/Alarm Switch circuit must be same polarity as the main circuit. On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 5 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. 6 Standard actuator colors are black and white. 7 Adapter plate with mounting centers of 2.082 inches. Available with Actuator Codes A, S and T. 8 Voltage Rating available with 2 and 3-pole breakers only. 9 Barriers supplied on multi-pole units only. 41 B-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Circuit & Terminal Diagrams Circuit & Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] SERIES TRIP (2 TERM'S.) ANSI IEC SERIES TRIP LINE (NETZ) LINE LINE MAIN TERM'S. (SEE TABLE A) A CIRCUIT CODE AUX SWITCH CODE CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC CIRCUIT CODE AUX SWITCH CODE CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC ANSI IEC SWITCH ONLY (NO COIL) LINE (3) (NETZ) O B C O B C 2 3 4 H 0 K 0 I> LOAD (LAST) LOAD 1.730 [43.94] LOAD LOAD (LAST) SERIES TRIP WITH AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH SWITCH ONLY (NO COIL) WITH AUXILIARY SWITCH .520 [13.21] LINE SERIES TRIP W AUX SWITCH (5 TERM'S.) LINE (NETZ) LINE C C NO NO NO NC NC AUX. SWITCH TERM'S. A 2 3 4 LINE LINE (NETZ) (3) SHUNT (NEBENSCHLUSS) D E 1 LINE (NETZ) LINE (3) (NETZ) LINE (NETZ) 1 U> VOLTAGE COIL VOLTAGE COIL 1 2 I> U> 2 LOAD F G 0 VOLTAGE COIL 3 I> 3 4 4 RELAY (RELAIS) RELAY .390 [9.91] LOAD (LAST) LINE 1 RELAY 3 I> DUAL COIL; SERIES TRIP CURRENT COIL, RELAY TRIP VOLTAGE COIL RELAY (RELAIS) 2 4 LOAD (LAST) LOAD 3 2 NC ALARM SWITCH VOLTAGE COIL LOAD (LAST) 1 .780 [19.81] I> 0 RELAY TRIP RELAY TRIP (4 TERM'S.) NO LINE I> LINE NO LOAD SHUNT LOAD C DUAL COIL; SERIES TRIP CURRENT COIL, SHUNT TRIP VOLTAGE COIL SHUNT TRIP (3 TERM'S.) .390 [9.91] C ALARM SWITCH SHUNT TRIP (3) STD. AUX. SWITCH NC NC LOAD (LAST) LOAD LINE (NETZ) STD. AUX. SWITCH C 2 4 LOAD (LAST) 4 LOAD (LAST) LOAD 3 VOLTAGE COIL HANDLE POSITION VS. AUX/ALARM SWITCH MODE STANDARD C/B CIRCUIT BREAKER MODE HANDLE POSITION MID TRIP C/B MID TRIP C/B AUX. SWITCH MODE HANDLE POSITION ALARM SWITCH MODE HANDLE POSITION 30° 30° AUX. SWITCH MODE (w/o ALARM SWITCH) 30° OFF F O OF NC NO C F O OF NC NO C F O OF ON ON ON I I I NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C ON 30° NC NO 30° C 30° NC NO 90° 90° MID TRIP ELECTRICAL TRIP F O OF 30° C NC NO C MID TRIP NC NO C Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 3 Alarm Switch available with .110 x .020 Q.C. & Solder Lug Terminals Only. 42 www.carlingtech.com B-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Circuit & Terminal Diagrams Circuit & Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] TERMINAL DIMENSIONAL DETAIL & RATING 1.000 [25.40] .392 [9.97] .205 [5.21] .360[9.14] .392[9.96] .250[6.35] .392[9.96] .375[9.53] .375[9.53] .069[1.75] DIA TAB (Q.C.) 30 AMP .344[8.74] .250[6.35] QC SOLDER LUG BUS #8-32 30 AMP #10-32 30 AMP M5 30 AMP M4 30 AMP #8-32 30 AMP #10-32 50 AMP .405[10.29] .437 [11.10] .093DIA [.76] UPTURN LUG M6 STUD #8-32 30 AMP #10-32 50 AMP M5 50 AMP M4 30 AMP [+.05] [-.00] .110 [2.80] .161 DIA [Ø 4.10] .110 [2.80] .051 DIA[Ø1.29] .087 [2.20] PUSH-IN STUD .126 [3.20] .287 [7.29] MATING HOLE TAB (Q.C.) .070 DIA [Ø1.80] SOLDER TYPE 1.313 [33.35] 2.230 [56.64] TYP .154 [3.91] DIA PUSH-IN STUD 50 AMP AUXILIARY SWITCH TERMINAL DETAIL +.002 -.000 .100 [2.54] .750 [19.05] BACK CONNECT 30 AMP CENTERLINE OF PUSH-IN STUD CONTACT AREA .750[19.05] 50 AMP TABLE A TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS THREAD SIZE #6-32 & M3 MOUNTING HARDWARE #8-32 & M4 THREAD TERMINAL SCREW #10-32 & M5 THREAD TERMINAL SCREW TORQUE 7-9 IN-LBS [0.8-1.0 NM] 12-15 IN-LBS [1.4-1.7 NM] 15-20 IN-LBS [1.7-2.3 NM] .520 [13.21] TABLE B LINE LINE TAB (Q.C.) MAIN 2.000 [50.80] LOAD LOAD SCREW TYPE 2.122 [53.90] SHUNT, RELAY TAB (Q.C.) & SCREW #8-32 DUAL COIL W/UPTURNED LUGS TAB (Q.C.) .110 x .020 AUX. SWITCH* SOLDER TYPE 2.612 [66.35] 2.644 [67.16] 2.537 [64.44] 2.348 [59.64] * AVAILABLE ON SERIES TRIP AND SWITCH ONLY CIRCUITS. .875 [22.23] REF BARRIER FOR UL-489 MULTI-POLE BREAKERS BARRIER FOR UL-RECOGNIZED MULTI-POLE BREAKERS SEE TABLE-B DEPTH BEHIND PANEL WHEN CALLED FOR ON MULTI-POLE UNITS, ONLY ONE AUX. SWITCH IS NORMALLY SUPPLIED, AS SHOWN IN MULTI-POLE IDENTIFICATION SCHEME. .393 [9.96] REF LINE (NETZ) ON I MID TRIP DEPTH BEHIND PANEL 2.090 [53.09] TERMINAL DESCRIPTION 1.560 [39.62] TYP 1.936[49.17] 1.350 [34.29] OFF O 30° 2 PLCS 1.560 [39.62] TYP LOAD (LAST) .032 [.81] TYP .220 [5.59] TYP PUSH-IN STUD M6 STUD SCREW TERMINAL WITH 30° BEND 1.250 [31.75] BACK CONNECT SCREW TERMINAL BACK CONNECT SCREW TERMINAL WITH RETAINER Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 43 B-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ± 0.20 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 44 www.carlingtech.com B-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Front Panel Snap-in Mounting Style 5 - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Recommended panel thickness: .040 [1.02] to .100 [2.54]. 3 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 45 B-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Front Panel Snap-In Mounting Style 7 - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Recommended panel thickness: .040 [1.02] to .100 [2.54]. 3 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 46 www.carlingtech.com B-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker UL489 Listed – Ordering Scheme B F 1 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 24 630 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 1 SERIES B 2 ACTUATOR Two Color Visi-Rocker C Indicate ON, vertical legend D Indicate ON, horizontal legend F Indicate OFF, vertical legend G Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Single color J Vertical legend K Horizontal legend 2 3 A 8 Terminal 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers 8 TERMINAL 5 1 6 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) B 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs C 3 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) F 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs 5 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) G 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs H & 30° bend J 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) K & 30° bend N 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs Y & 30° bend 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend K G 11 Max. Appl. Rating 12 Agency Approval Screw M5 with upturned lugs Screw M4 with upturned lugs Screw M5 with upturned lugs & 30° bend Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend Screw M5 (Bus Type) Screw M5 Back Connect Screw 10-32 Back Connect Screw M4 Back Connect Screw 8-32 Back Connect 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND Actuator or Marking: Marking Color Visi-Color 7 ON-OFFDual 7 Single Color Visi-Rocker White B1Black White Black D2Whiten/a Red G3WhiteRed Green J4WhiteGreen Blue L5WhiteBlue Yellow N6Black Yellow Gray Q7Black Gray Orange S8Black Orange 3 POLES 1,2 1 One 2 3 3 Three Two 4 CIRCUIT B Series Trip (Current) 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 4 0 without Aux Switch 7 1 S.P.D.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 8 3 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Solder Lug 9 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 21 AC Ultra Short 22 AC Short 24 AC Medium 26 AC Long S.P.S.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 42 AC, Short,Hi-Inrush 44 AC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 46 AC, Long, Hi-Inrush 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) CODEAMPERES 0200.020 0250.025 0300.030 0350.035 0400.040 0450.045 0500.050 0550.055 0600.060 0650.065 0700.070 0750.075 0800.080 0850.085 0900.090 0950.095 2100.100 2150.150 2200.200 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 2850.850 2900.900 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 www.carlingtech.com 4151.500 517 1.750 4202.000 5222.250 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 610 10.000 71010.500 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS MOUNTING STYLEBARRIERS 9 Threaded Insert, 2 per pole A 6-32 x 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only)yes B ISO M3 x 5mm yes ROCKERGUARD BEZEL Threaded Insert, 2 per pole C 6-32 X 0.225 inches (multi-pole units only)yes D ISO M3 x 6.5mm yes 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING C 8 120/240 VAC K 120 VAC 12 AGENCY APPROVAL G UL489 Listed 3 UL489 Listed, TUV Certified Notes: 1 Multi-pole breakers have all breakers identical except when specifying Auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles, and have one rocker per breaker. 2 All poles must be same polarity. 3 3 pole units available only when 1 of 3 poles is neutral. 4 On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 5 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. 6 Terminal Code 1 (Push-On) available up to 30 amps, but are not recommended over 20 amps. 7 Dual legend = ON-OFF/I-O 8 Voltage Rating available with 2 and 3-pole breakers only. 9 Barriers supplied on multi-pole units only. 47 B-Series Circuit Breaker - Flat Rocker UL489 Listed – Ordering Scheme B 1 1 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 24 630 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 1 SERIES B 2 ACTUATOR 1 Two Color Visi-Rocker 1 Indicate OFF, vertical legend 2 Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Single color 3 Vertical legend 4 Horizontal legend Push-To-Reset, Visi-Rocker 5 Indicate OFF, vertical legend 6 Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Push-To-Reset , Single color 7 Vertical legend 8 Horizontal legend 2 3 A 8 Terminal 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers 8 TERMINAL 6 1 7 Push-On 0.250 Tab (Q.C.) B 2 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs C 3 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) F 4 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs 5 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) G 6 Screw 8-32 with upturned lugs H & 30° bend J 7 Screw 8-32 (Bus Type) K & 30° bend N 8 Screw 10-32 with upturned lugs Y & 30° bend 9 Screw 10-32 (Bus Type) & 30° bend K G 11 Max. Appl. Rating 12 Agency Approval Screw M5 with upturned lugs Screw M4 with upturned lugs Screw M5 with upturned lugs & 30° bend Screw M5 (Bus Type) & 30° bend Screw M5 (Bus Type) Screw M5 Back Connect Screw 10-32 Back Connect Screw M4 Back Connect Screw 8-32 Back Connect 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND Actuator or Marking: Marking Color Visi-Color 8 ON-OFFDual 8 Single Color Visi-Rocker White B1Black White Black D2Whiten/a Red G3WhiteRed Green J4WhiteGreen Blue L5WhiteBlue Yellow N6Black Yellow Gray Q7Black Gray Orange S8Black Orange 3 POLES 2,3 1 One 2 3 4 Three Two 4 CIRCUIT B Series Trip (Current) 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 4 0 without Aux Switch 7 1 S.P.D.T., 0.093 Q.C. Term. 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 8 3 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Solder Lug 9 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 21 AC Ultra Short 22 AC Short 24 AC Medium 26 AC Long S.P.S.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 42 AC, Short,Hi-Inrush 44 AC, Medium, Hi-Inrush 46 AC, Long, Hi-Inrush 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) CODEAMPERES 0200.020 0250.025 0300.030 0350.035 0400.040 0450.045 0500.050 0550.055 0600.060 0650.065 0700.070 0750.075 0800.080 0850.085 0900.090 0950.095 2100.100 2150.150 48 2200.200 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 2850.850 2900.900 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 4151.500 517 1.750 4202.000 5222.250 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 610 10.000 71010.500 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS 9 STANDARD ROCKER BEZEL BARRIERS 12 Threaded Insert, 2 per pole FLAT ROCKER ACTUATOR A 6-32 x 0.195 inches (multi-pole units only)yes B ISO M3 x 5mm yes RECESSED OFF SIDE ROCKER ACTUATOR 10 E 6-32 X 0.225 inches (multi-pole units only)yes F ISO M3 x 6.5mm yes PUSH-TO-RESET BEZEL,Threaded Insert, 2 per pole C 6-32 x 0.195 inches yes D ISO M3 x 5mm yes 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING C 11 120/240 VAC K 120 VAC 12 AGENCY APPROVAL G UL489 Listed 3 UL489 Listed, TUV Certified Notes: 1 Push-To-Reset actuators have OFF portion of rocker shrouded. 2 Multi-pole breakers have all breakers identical except when specifying Auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles, and have one rocker per breaker. 3 All poles must be same polarity. 4 3 pole units available only when1 of 3 poles is neutral. 5 On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 6 Screw Terminals are recommended on ratings greater than 20 amps. 7 Terminal Code 1 (Push-On) available up to 30 amps, but are not recommended over 20 amps. 8 Color shown is visi and legend with remainder of rocker black, Dual = ON-OFF/I-O legend. 9 Legend on Push-to-reset bezel/shroud is white with single color actuator codes 7 & 8. Legend on Push-To-Reset bezel/shroud matches Visi-Color of rocker with actuator codes 5 & 6. 10 Recessed “off-side” available with actuator codes 1, 2, 3 & 4. Legends on rocker are available in ink stamping only. 11 Voltage rating available with 2 & 3-pole breakers only. 12 Barriers supplied on multi-pole units only. www.carlingtech.com B-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker UL489 Listed - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 Dimensions apply to all variations shown. Notice that circuit breaker line & load terminal orientation on indicate “OFF” is opposite of indicate “ON”. 2 For pole orientation with horizontal legend, rotate front view clockwise 90°. 3 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 4 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 49 B-Series Circuit Breaker - Flat Rocker UL489 Listed - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 For pole orientation with horizontal legend, rotate front view clockwise 90°. 3 Tolerance ±.010 [.25] unless otherwise specified. 50 www.carlingtech.com B-Series Circuit Breaker - PC Terminal Diagrams PC Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 For pole orientation with horizontal legend, rotate front view clockwise 90°. 3 Tolerance ±.010 [.25] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 51 C-Series C-Series Circuit Breaker - Introduction C-Series CIRCUIT BREAKER The C-Series hydraulic-magnetic circuit breakers are ideal for applications that require higher amperage and voltage handling capability in a smaller package. They are available in 1-6 poles, 0.02-100amps, UL Recognized up to 480VAC or 150VDC, UL489 Listed up to 240VAC or 125VDC, with choice of time delays, terminal options, actuator styles and colors. The C-Series employs a unique arc chute design which allows for higher interrupting capacities of up to 10,000 amps. New thermoset glass filled polyester half shell construction provides for increased mechanical and electrical strength. The wiping contacts, mechanical linkage with two step actuation, clean contacts providing high, positive contact pressure and longer contact life. Available with American Standard or Metric Threaded Stud terminals , or Saddle Clamp screw terminals. The optional mid-trip handle style actuator allows a visual indication of electrical overload with or without alarm feature. Product Highlights: Extensive list of Agency Approvals Available with Standard or Metric Stud terminals, or Saddle Clamp screw terminals Optional mid-trip handle style actuator Unique arc chute design which allows for higher interrupting capacities of up to 10,000 amps Exclusive Rockerguard and Push-To-Reset bezel Available with new solid color and two-color Visirocker® actuators New thermoset glass filled polyester half shell construction Only Military applicable ordering schemes and drawings are shown in this catalog. For complete product details, please visit www.carlingtech.com 52 www.carlingtech.com C-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Maximum Voltage AC, 480 WYE/277 VAC, 50/60 Hz (see Table A.) UL489: AC,240 VAC. (See Table D), 50/60 Hz, 125 VDC Current Rating Standard current coils: 0.100, 0.250, 0.500, 0.750, 1.00, 2.50, 5.00, 7.50, 10.0, 15.0, 25.0, 30.0, 35.0, 40.0, 50.0, 60.0, 70.0, 80.0, 90.0 and 100 amps. Other ratings available, see Ordering Scheme. Standard Voltage Coils DC - 6V, 12V; AC - 120V; other ratings available, see Ordering Scheme. Auxiliary Switch Rating SPDT; 10.1 amps-250VAC, DC Aux. Switch 1.0A, 65 VDC. 0.5A, 80VDC,1/4 HP, 125VAC,VDE & TUV 1.0 125 VAC. Insulation Resistance Minimum of 100 Megohms at 500 VDC. Dielectric Strength UL, CSA: 1960 V 50/60 Hz for one minute between all electrically isolated terminals. C-Series Circuit Breakers comply with the 8mm spacing and 3750V 50/60 Hz dielectric requirements from hazardous voltage to operator accessible surfaces, between adjacent poles and from main circuits to auxiliary circuits per Publications EN 60950 and VDE 0805. Resistance, Impedance Values from Line to Load Terminal based on Series Trip Circuit Breaker. Mechanical Endurance 10,000 ON-OFF operations @ 6 per minute; with rated current & voltage. Trip Free All C-Series circuit breakers will trip on overload, even when actuator is forcibly held in the ON position. Trip Indication The operating actuator moves positively to the OFF position when an overload causes the breaker to trip. With mid-trip, handle moves to the mid position on electrical trip of the circuit breaker. With mid trip handle with alarm switch, handle moves to the mid position and the alarm switch actuates when the circuit breaker is electrically tripped. Physical Number of Poles Internal Circuit Config. Weight Standard Colors 1-6 poles ≤ 50A; 1-4 poles @ 5170A; 1-2 poles 71-100A. UL489 Handle: 1 pole ≤ 100A, 2 pole ≤ 50A; Rocker: 1 pole ≤ 100A. Series (with or without auxiliary switch, mid trip & mid trip with alarm switch) Shunt & Relay with current or voltage trip coils, Dual Coil, Switch Only (with or without aux. switch). UL489: Series (with or without auxiliary switch, mid-trip & midtrip with alarm switch). Approx.112 grams/pole ( 3.95 oz). Housing: Black RESISTANCE, IMPEDANCE VALUES from Line to Load Terminals (Values Based on Series Trip Circuit Breaker ) 1000 CURRENT TOLERANCE (AMPS) (%) 0.10 - 5.0 5.1 - 20.0 15 25 20.1 - 50.0 35 100 10 O H M S 1 60 Hz 1/2 Cycle Inrush Pulse Tolerance 0.1 Multiple of Rated Current Ir 0.01 0.001 0.01 0.1 1 10 Time Delay Curves 42, 44 & 46 (50 Amps Max.) 25x Time Delay Curves 22, 24 (100 Amps Max.) 26 (70 Amps Max.) 12x 100 t AMPERE RATING 4.165 8.33 16.67 Pulse Tolerance Curves CURRENT (AMPS) TOLERANCE (%) 0.100 - 5.0 15% 60 Hz5.1 1/2- 20.0 Cycle 20.1 -Tolerance 100 Inrush Pulse 25% 35% Ir FIGURE Time Delay Curves 1 Multiple of Rated Current Multiple of Rated Current Ir 42, 44 & 46 (50 Amps Max.) 25x Time Delay Curves 22, 24 (100 Amps Max.) 26 (70 Amps Max.) 12x Time Delay Curves 42, 44 & 46 (50 Amps Max.) 22x Time Delay Curves 22, 24 (100 Amps Max.) 26 (70 Amps Max.) 10x t t 4.165 Ir Multiple of Rated Current 50 Hz 1/2 Cycle Inrush Pulse Tolerance 8.33 5.0 10.0 16.67 50 Hz 1/2 Cycle Inrush Pulse Tolerance Time Delay Curves 42, 44 & 46 (50 Amps Max.) 22x Time Delay Curves 22, 24 (100 Amps Max.) 26 (70 Amps Max.) 10x 20.0 Time in Milliseconds Environmental Designed and tested in accordance with requirements of specification MIL-PRF-55629 & MIL-STD-202 as follows: Shock Withstands 100 Gs, 6ms sawtooth while carrying rated current per Method 213, Test Condition “I”. Instantaneous and ultrashort curves tested @ 90% of rated current. Vibration Withstands 0.060” excursion from 10-55 Hz & 10 Gs 55-500 Hz, @ rated current per Method 204C, Test Cond. A. Instantaneous & ultrashort curves tested @ 90% of rated current. Moisture Resistance Method 106D, i.e., ten 24-hour cycles @ +25°C to +65°C, 80-98% RH. Salt Spray Method 101, Condition A (90-95% RH @ 5% NaCl Solution, 96 hrs). Thermal Shock Method 107D, Condition A (five cycles @ -55°C to +25°C to +85°C to +25°C). Operating Temperature -40°C to +85°C t 5.0 10.0 20.0 *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. Time in Milliseconds www.carlingtech.com 53 C-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table A: Lists UL Recognized & CSA Accepted configurations and performance capabilities as a Component Supplementary Protector C-SERIES TABLE A: COMPONENT SUPPLEMENTARY PROTECTORS VOLTAGE CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION SERIES CURRENT RATING FREQUENCY PHASE FULL LOAD AMPS 32 DC --- 0.02 - 100 --- --- 48 DC --- 110 - 150 --- --- 65 DC --- 0.02 - 70 --- 80 DC --- 80 DC --- 125 DC 125 / 250 250 NOTES UL CSA 5000 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 5000 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 --- 5000 TC1,2, OL1,U1 TC1,2, OL1,U1 --- 71 -100 --- 5000 TC1,2, OL0,U1 TC1,2, OL0,U1 0.02 - 70 --- --- 7500 TC1,2, OL1,U1 TC1,2, OL1,U1 --- 71 -100 --- 7500 TC1,2, OL0,U1 TC1,2, OL0,U1 0.02 - 70 --- --- 10,000 TC1,2, OL1,U1 TC1,2, OL1,U1 Must Have Agency Code "L" --- 71 -100 --- 10,000 TC1,2, OL0,U1 TC1,2, OL0,U1 Must Have Agency Code "L" --- 0.02 - 50 --- 5000 TC1,2,OL1,U1 TC1,2,OL1,U1 DC --- 0.02 - 50 --- 5000 TC1,2,OL1,U1 TC1,2,OL1,U1 Must Have Agency Code "L" DC --- 0.02 - 50 --- 5000 TC1,2,OL1,U1 TC1,2,OL1,U1 Must Have Agency Code "L". 2 Pole Break Required for 250 Volts 0.02 - 100 --- --- 3000 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 Per Pole Rating 0.02 - 100 --- --- 5000 TC1,2,OL1,U1 TC1,2,OL1,U1 Must Have Agency Code "L" Must Have Agency Code "L" 50 / 60 1 150 DC --- --- 80 - 100 --- 5000 TC1, OL0, U3 --- Must Have Agency Code "L" 150 DC --- --- 101 - 175 --- 5000 TC1, OL0, U3 --- Must Have Agency Code "L" Parallel Pole 0.02 - 100 --- --- 3500 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 125 / 250 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 50 --- --- 3000 TC1,2,OL1,U1 TC1,2,OL1,U1 51 - 100 --- --- 1000 TC1,2,OL1,U1 TC1,2,OL1,U1 2 or 3 poles breaking single phase 0.02 - 100 --- --- 5000 TC1,2,OL1,U2 TC1,2,OL1,U2 2 or 3 poles breaking single phase, "L" Agency Code 0.02 - 50 --- --- 3500 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 Per Pole Rating 0.02 - 100 --- --- 5000 TC1,2,OL1,U1 TC1,2,OL1,U1 Must Have Agency Code "L" 51 - 70 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 --- 0.02 - 100 --- 3000 TC1, OL0, U2 TC1, OL0, U2 0.02 - 70 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 3 poles breaking 3 phase --- 0.02 - 90 --- 5000 TC1,2,OL0,U1 TC1,2,OL0,U1 Must Have Agency Code "L" 0.02 - 50 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 0.02 - 30 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 --- 31 - 50 5000 --- TC1,2,OL0,C1 TC1,2,OL0,C1 50 / 60 3 277 50 / 60 1 480 / 277 50 / 60 3 480 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 30 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 --- 31 - 50 5000 --- TC1,2,OL0,C1 TC1,2,OL0,C1 TC1,2, OL1,U1 2 or 3 poles breaking single phase 3 poles breaking 3 phase 2 poles breaking 1 phase 80 DC --- 0.02 - 50 --- --- 7500 TC1,2, OL1,U1 125 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 50 --- --- 3000 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 Per Pole Rating 125 / 250 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 50 --- --- 3500 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 2 or 3 poles breaking single phase 0.02 - 50 --- --- 3000 TC1,2,OL1,U1 TC1,2,OL1,U1 2 or 3 poles breaking single phase 0.02 - 50 --- --- 3500 TC1, OL1, U2 TC1, OL1, U2 250 50 / 60 0.02 - 50 --- --- 3000 TC1, OL0, U2 TC1, OL0, U2 0.02 - 50 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 DUAL COIL SWITCH ONLY APPLICATION CODES 125 250 RELAY UL/CSA WITH BACKUP WITHOUT BACKUP GENERAL PURPOSE AMPS FUSE FUSE 1 MAX. RATING 1 SHUNT SHORT CIRCUIT CAPACITY (AMPS) 1 3 277 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 50 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 80 DC --- 0.02 - 50 --- --- 7500 TC1,2, OL1,U1 TC1,2, OL1,U1 Per Pole Rating 3 poles breaking 3 phase 277 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 50 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 250 50 / 60 3 0.02 - 50 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 3 poles breaking 3 phase 480 / 277 50 / 60 3 0.02 - 30 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 3 poles breaking 3 phase TC1,2,OL0,C1 480 50 / 60 1 --- 31 - 50 5000 --- TC1,2,OL0,C1 0.02 - 30 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 --- 31 - 50 5000 --- TC1,2,OL0,C1 TC1,2,OL0,C1 TC1,2, OL1,U1 80 DC --- 0.02 - 50 --- --- 7500 TC1,2, OL1,U1 277 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 50 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 250 50 / 60 3 0.02 - 50 --- 5000 --- TC1,2,OL1,C1 TC1,2,OL1,C1 65 DC --- 0.02 - 70 --- --- --- --- --- 80 DC --- 125 50 / 60 125 / 250 50 / 60 250 50 / 60 277 50 / 60 480 / 277 50 / 60 --- 71 -100 --- --- --- --- 0.02 - 70 --- --- --- --- --- --- 71 -100 --- --- --- --- 1 0.02 - 100 --- --- --- --- --- 1 0.02 - 100 --- --- --- --- --- 1 0.02 - 100 --- --- --- --- --- 3 0.02 - 70 --- --- --- --- --- 1 0.02 - 50 --- --- --- --- --- 0.02 - 30 --- --- --- --- --- --- 31 - 50 --- --- --- --- 3 2 poles breaking 1 phase 3 poles breaking 3 phase 2 or 3 poles breaking single phase 3 poles breaking 3 phase Notes: 1. Requires branch circuit backup with a UL LISTED Type K5 or RK5 fuse rated 15A minimum and no more than 4 times full load amps not to exceed 125A for 50 Amp or less rating and not to exceed 175 for 51 through 100 Amp rating 54 www.carlingtech.com C-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table B: Lists UL Recognized and CSA Accepted configurations and performance capabilities as a Manual Motor Controller. RELAY Notes: 1 UL recognized and CSA Accepted at 480V refers to 3 & 4 pole versions used in a 3Ø, wye connected circuit or 2-pole version connected with 2 poles breaking. 1Ø and backed up with series fusing as stated above in note 1. * Series, Shunt and Relay Trip - Voltage Coil Construction not current coils Table C: Lists UL Recognized, CSA Accepted, VDE and TUV Certified configurations and performance capabilities as a Component Supplementary Protector. Notes: 1. General Purpose ratings for UL/CSA only. 2. Requires branch circuit backup with a UL LISTED Type K5 or RK5 fuse rated 15A minimum and no more than 4 times full load amps not to exceed 125A for 50 Amp or less rating and not to exceed 175 for 51 through 100 Amp rating. Table D: Lists UL Listed (489), CSA Certified (C22.2 No. 5.1-M) configuration and performance capabilities as a Molded Case Circuit Breaker. C SERIES TABLE D : UL489 LISTED BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION SERIES DUAL COIL INTERRUPTING CAPACITY (AMPS) WITHOUT FULL LOAD BACKUP FUSE AMPS CURRENT RATING VOLTAGE CONSTRUCTION NOTES MAX. RATING FREQUENCY PHASE 80 DC --- 0.10 - 100 125 DC --- 0.10 - 100 5,000 1 - 3 Poles 125 / 250 DC --- 0.10 - 50 5,000 1 or 2 Poles (2 Poles Required for 250 Volts) 120 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 50 10,000 1 - 3 Poles 51 - 70 5,000 1 - 3 Poles 0.10 - 50 5,000 2 or 3 Poles. 1 Pole of a 3 Pole Unit is Neutral 50,000 1 Limited to 2 Poles Max from 71 - 100 Amps. 10,000 Limited to 2 Poles Max from 71 - 100 Amps. 120 / 240 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 50 10000 1 2 or 3 Poles. 1 Pole of a 3 Pole Unit is Neutral 240 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 30 5,000 1Pole 240 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 20 5,000 2 Pole 277 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 20 10,000 1Pole 120 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 30 10,000 --- Notes from Table D: 1. Special catalog number required. Consult factory. www.carlingtech.com 55 C-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table E: Lists UL Recognized, CSA Accepted configurations and performance capabilities as Protectors, Supplementary for Marine Electrical and Fuel Systems (Guide PEQZ2, File E75596). Ignition Protected per UL 1500. UL Classified Small Craft Electrical Devices, Marine in accordance with ISO 8846 (Guide UZMK, File MQ1515) as Marine Supplementary Protectors. Table F: Lists UL Listed configurations and performance capabilities as Circuit Breakers for use in Communications Equipment (Guide DITT, File E189195), under UL489A. Agency Certifications UL Recognized UL Standard 1077 Component Recognition Program as Protectors Supplementary (Guide CCN/QVNU2, File E75596) CSA Accepted Component Supplementary Protector under Class 3215 30, FIle 047848 0 000 CSA Standard C22.2 No. 235 UL Standard 508 Switches, Industrial Control (Guide CCN/NRNT2, File E148683) CSA Certified UL Standard 1500 Protectors, Supplementary for Marine Electrical & Fuel Systems (Guide PEQZ2, File E75596) Ignition Protection Circuit Breaker Model Case (Class 1432 01, File 093910), CSA Standard C22.2 No. 5.1 - M TUV Certified EN60934, under License No. R72040875 Circuit Breakers, Molded Case, (Guide DIVQ, File E129899) VDE Certified EN60934, VDE 0642 under File No. 10537 UL Listed UL Standard 489 UL Standard 489A 56 Communications Equipment (Guide CCN/DITT, File E189195) www.carlingtech.com C-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle UL Recognized – Ordering Scheme C A 3 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 10 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 6 Frequency & Delay 1 SERIES C 9 Actuator Color C 10 Mounting Bezel/Barrier 11 Agency Approval CODEAMPERES Handle, one per pole Handle, one per multipole unit Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole & Alarm Switch 3 POLES 2 1 One 2 Two 1 2 1 8 Terminal 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 2 ACTUATOR 1 A B S T 450 7 Current Rating 3 4 Three Four 4 CIRCUIT 3 A 3 Switch Only (No Coil) B Series Trip (Current) C Series Trip (Voltage) 4 D Shunt Trip (Current) 4 E Shunt Trip (Voltage) 5 6 Five Six F 4 Relay Trip (Current) G 4 Relay Trip (Voltage) H 4,5 Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Voltage Coil K 4,5 Dual Coil with Relay Trip Voltage Coil 0200.020 2350.350 4303.000 0250.025 2400.400 4353.500 0300.030 2450.450 4404.000 0350.035 2500.500 4454.500 0400.040 2550.550 4505.000 0450.045 2600.600 4555.500 0500.050 2650.650 4606.000 0550.055 2700.700 4656.500 0600.060 2750.750 4707.000 0650.065 2800.800 4757.500 0700.070 2850.850 4808.000 0750.075 2900.900 4858.500 0800.080 2950.950 4909.000 0850.085 4101.000 4959.500 0900.090 5121.250 610 10.000 0950.095 4151.500 71010.500 2100.100 517 1.750 611 11.000 2150.150 4202.000 71111.500 2200.200 5222.250 61212.000 2250.250 4252.500 71212.500 2300.300 5272.750 61313.000 OR VOLTAGE COIL (NORMAL RATED VOLTAGE) 7 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 35.000 640 40.000 65050.000 660 960.000 670 970.000 680 980.000 685 985.000 690 990.000 695 995.000 810 9100.00 A06 6 DC A12 12 DC A18 18 DC A24 24 DC J65 65 AC K20 120 AC L40 240 AC CODEAMPERES 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 0 without Aux Switch 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 3 S.P.D.T., 0.139 Solder Lug 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 3 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 7 DC Instantaneous 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 7 50/60Hz Instantaneous 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 6 8 9 30 31 32 34 36 42 8 44 8 46 8 52 8 54 8 56 S.P.S.T., 0.139 Solder Lug S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. DC 50/60Hz Instantaneous DC 50/60Hz Ultra Short DC 50/60Hz Short DC 50/60Hz Medium DC 50/60Hz Long 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush DC Short, Hi-Inrush DC Medium, Hi-Inrush DC Long, Hi-Inrush Notes: 1 Actuator Code: A: Handle tie pin spacer(s) and retainers provided assembled with multi-pole units. B: Handle location as viewed from front of breaker: 2 pole - left pole 3 pole - center pole 4 pole - two handles at center poles 5 pole - three handles at center poles 6 pole - four handles at center poles S: Handle moves to mid-position only upon electrical trip of the breaker. Available with circuit codes B, C, D, E, F, G, H and K. T: Handle moves to mid-position and alarm switch activates only upon electrical trip of the breaker. Available with circuit codes B & C. 2 Standard multipole units have all poles identical except when specifying auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles. 4 pole max with VDE. 5th pole available as Series Trip with Voltage Coil only. 3 Switch Only circuits, rated up to 50 amps and 6 poles, and only available with VDE Certification when tied to a protected pole (Circuit Code B, C, D or H.). For .02 to 30 amps, select Current Code 630. For 35 - 50 amps, select Current Code 650. For 55-70 amps, select Current Code 670. For 75-100 amps, select Current Code 810. 4 Circuit Codes D,E,F,G,H & K available with Terminal Codes 1,2,4 & 5 only. Circuit Codes D, F, H & K available up to 50 amps maximum Current Rating. 5 Consult factory for available Dual Coil options, as special catalog number is required. Dual Coil Voltage Coils with Shunt Trip Construction trip instantaneously on line voltage. Dual Coil Voltage Coils require 30VA minimum power to trip instantaneously and are rated for intermittent duty only. 6 Auxiliary Switch available with Series Trip and Switch Only circuits. On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 7 Voltage coils not rated for continuous duty. Available only with delay codes 10 & 20. 8 Available with Circuit Codes B & D only, and up to 50 amps maximum. 9 Current Ratings 60 - 70 are available up to four poles maximum. Ratings 71 - 100 are available up to two poles maximum. 10 Terminal Code 1 available to 60 amps maximum. 11 Terminal Codes 2, 4, 5 and C available to 50 amps maximum. 12 Terminal Codes 3, 6 & 9 available to 100 amps maximum. 13 Terminal Code 7 available to 25 amps maximum. 14 Terminal Code A available to 100 amps maximum. 15 Terminal Codes 7, 9 & C are not VDE approved. 16 No marking available. Consult factory. VDE/TUV Approval requires dual (I-O, ON-OFF) or I-O markings on all handles. 17 Single pole only. 18 VDE/TUV: 30 amps max.; UL/CSA: 50 amps max.; Available in 2 - 4 poles only and limited to AC Delays. “General Purpose amps” not rated for “full load amps” or to be used in applications with a motor. www.carlingtech.com A32 32 DC A48 48 DC A65 65 DC J06 6 AC 8 TERMINAL 15 1 10 Stud 10-32 2 11 Screw 10-32 3 12 Stud 1/4-20 4 11 Stud M5 x 0.8 5 11 Screw M5 x 0.8 J12 J18 J24 J48 6 12 7 13,15 9 15 A 14 C 11,15 12 AC 18 AC 24 AC 48 AC Stud M6 0.250 Double Click Connect 7/16” Clip Terminal Plug-In Stud 5/16” Clip Terminal 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND 16 Actuator Color I-O ON-OFF Dual Legend Color White AB 1Black Black CD 2White Red FG 3White Green HJ 4White Blue KL 5White Yellow MN 6Black Gray PQ 7Black Orange RS 8Black Black (short handle)17 TU 9 White 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS MOUNTING STYLE BARRIERS Threaded Insert 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches no A 6-32 X 0.195 inches yes 18 C 6-32 X 0.195 inches yes 2 ISO M3 x 5mm no B ISO M3 x 5mm yes D 18 ISO M3 x 5mm yes Front panel Snap-In, 1.00” [25.4mm] wide bezel 17 E with Handleguard no VOLTAGE < 300 < 300 ≥ 300 < 300 < 300 ≥ 300 < 300 11 AGENCY APPROVAL C UL Recognized, CSA Accepted D VDE Certified, UL Recognized, CSA Accepted E TUV Certified, UL Recognized, CSA Accepted H UL489 Construction: VDE Certified, UL Recognized, CSA Accepted I UL Recognized STD 1077, UL Recognized 1500 (ignition protected), CSA Accepted L UL489 Construction: UL Recognized, CSA Accepted R UL489 Construction: TUV Certified, UL Recognized, CSA Accepted 57 C-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle UL489 Listed – Ordering Scheme C A 3 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 14 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 6 Frequency & Delay 1 SERIES C 2 Two 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 3 0 without Aux Switch 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 3 S.P.D.T., 0.139 Solder Lug 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) 3 Three 6 8 9 S.P.S.T., 0.139 Solder Lug S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 26 42 4 44 4 46 4 52 4 54 4 56 4 50/60Hz Long 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush DC Short, Hi-Inrush DC Medium, Hi-Inrush DC Long, Hi-Inrush Notes: 1 Actuator Code: A: Handle tie pin spacer(s) and retainers provided assembled with multi-pole units. B: Handle located, as viewed from front of breaker in left pole. 2 pole maximum. S: Handle moves to mid-position only upon electrical trip of the breaker. T: Handle moves to mid-position and alarm switch activates only upon electrical trip of the breaker. 2 Standard multipole units have all poles identical except when specifying auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles. 2 & 3 pole circuit breakers required for 120/240 VAC (Maximum application rating code C) applications, have all poles identical except when specifying auxiliary / alarm switch which is normally supplied in extreme right pole per figure B. Terminal barriers are required on all multipole breakers. Third pole is for 120/240 VAC applications requiring neutral disconnect. The 3rd pole has the same construction as poles 1 & 2. 3 On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary. switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. VDE approval on auxiliary switch codes 2, 3 & 4 only. Auxiliary / Alarm Switch with Independent Circuit ie: separate from breaker circuit, only available with circuit breakers rated 50 amp maximum at 80 VDC, 125 VDC, and 120 VAC. Auxiliary / Alarm Switch with Dependent Circuit ie: same as circuit breaker, is supplied from factory with common terminal of auxiliary / alarm switch connected to line terminal on 120/240 and 240 VAC ratings. Circuit breakers rated 120 VAC 50 amp maximum can be supplied with Auxiliary/Alarm switch common terminal connected to breaker line terminal. Consult factory for special catalog number. 4 Available up to 50 amps maximum. 5 Current ratings 71 - 100 with VDE approvals are available up to two poles maximum. 6 Terminal Codes 9 & C are not VDE approved. 7 Terminal Code 1 available to 60 amps maximum. 8 Terminal Codes 2, 4, 5 & C available to 50 amps maximum. 9 Terminal Codes 3, 6 & 9 available to 100 amps maximum. 10 Terminal Code A available to 100 amps maximum. 11 VDE and TUV approvals require Dual (I-O, ON-OFF) markings on all handles. 12 Barriers supplied on multi-pole units only. 58 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers K G 11 Max. App. Rating 12 Agency Approval CODEAMPERES 4 CIRCUIT B Series Trip (Current) 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 7 Current Rating 1 2 1 8 Terminal 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 2 ACTUATOR 1 A Handle, one per pole B Handle, one per multipole unit S Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole T Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole & Alarm Switch 3 POLES 2 1 One 450 2100.100 2150.150 2200.200 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 2850.850 2900.900 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 4151.500 517 1.750 4202.000 5222.250 4252.500 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 8 TERMINAL 6 1 7 Stud 10-32 2 8 Screw 10-32 3 9 Stud 1/4-20 4 8 Stud M5 x 0.8 5 8 Screw M5 x 0.8 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 610 10.000 71010.500 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 6 9 9 9 A 10 C 8 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 35.000 640 40.000 66060.000 67070.000 68080.000 68585.000 69090.000 69595.000 810100.00 Stud M6 7/16” Clip Terminal Plug-In Stud 5/16” Clip Terminal 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND 11 Actuator Color ON-OFF Dual Legend Color White B1Black Black D2White Red G3White Green J4White Blue L5White Yellow N6Black Gray Q7Black Orange S8Black 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS MOUNTING STYLE Threaded Insert 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches 2 ISO M3 x 5mm BARRIERS 12 yes yes 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING A 65 DC B 125 DC C 120/240 AC 2 D 240 AC K 120 AC F 277 AC M 80 DC 12 AGENCY APPROVAL 11 A without approvals F UL489 Listed, CSA Certified & VDE Certified G UL489 Listed & CSA Certified J UL489 Listed, CSA Certified & TUV Certified www.carlingtech.com C-Series Circuit Breaker - Sealed Toggle UL Recognized – Ordering Scheme C M 3 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 10 6 Frequency & Delay 9 Legend Plate C 10 Mounting Bezel/Barrier 11 Agency Approval CODEAMPERES 2 ACTUATOR 1 Sealed Toggle, one per pole 3 POLES 1 One 1 0 1 8 Terminal 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 9 1 SERIES C M 450 7 Current Rating 2 Two 3 Three 4 CIRCUIT A 2 Switch Only (no coil) B Series Trip (current) C Series Trip (voltage) D 3 Shunt Trip (current) E 3 Shunt Trip (voltage) F 3 G 3 H 3,4 K 3,4 Relay Trip (current) Relay Trip (voltage) Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Voltage Coil Dual Coil with Relay Trip Voltage Coil 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 0 without Aux Switch 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 3 S.P.D.T., 0.139 Solder Lug 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) 6 8 9 S.P.S.T., 0.139 Solder Lug S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 2 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 6 DC Instantaneous 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 6 50/60Hz Instantaneous 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 30 31 32 34 36 42 7 44 7 46 7 52 7 54 7 56 DC 50/60Hz Instantaneous DC 50/60Hz Ultra Short DC 50/60Hz Short DC 50/60Hz Medium DC 50/60Hz Long 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush DC Short, Hi-Inrush DC Medium, Hi-Inrush DC Long, Hi-Inrush Notes: 1 Actuator Code M: Handle location as viewed from front of breaker: 2 pole - right pole 3 pole - center pole 2 Switch Only circuits, rated up to 50 amps and 3 poles, and only available with VDE. For .02 to 30 amps, select Current Code 630. For 35 - 50 amps, select Current Code 650. For 55-70 amps, select Current Code 670. For 75-100 amps, select Current Code 810. 3 Circuit Codes D,E,F,G,H & K available with Terminal Codes 1,2,4 & 5 only. 4 Consult factory for available Dual Coil options, as special catalog number is required. Dual Coil Voltage Coils with Shunt Trip Construction trip instantaneously on line voltage. Dual Coil Voltage Coils require 30VA minimum power to trip instantaneously and are rated for intermittent duty only. 5 Auxiliary Switch available with Series Trip and Switch Only circuits. On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 6 Voltage coils not rated for continuous duty. Available only with delay codes 10 & 20. 7 Available with Circuit Codes B & D only, and up to 50 amps maximum. 8 Consult factory for current ratings 71-100, in three pole units, available as special catalog number only. 9 Terminal Code 1 available to 60 amps maximum. 10 Terminal Codes 2, 4, 5 and C available to 50 amps maximum. 11 Terminal Codes 3, 6 & 9 available to 100 amps maximum. 12 Terminal Code 7 available to 25 amps maximum. 13 Terminal Code A available to 100 amps maximum. www.carlingtech.com 0200.020 2350.350 4303.000 0250.025 2400.400 4353.500 0300.030 2450.450 4404.000 0350.035 2500.500 4454.500 0400.040 2550.550 4505.000 0450.045 2600.600 4555.500 0500.050 2650.650 4606.000 0550.055 2700.700 4656.500 0600.060 2750.750 4707.000 0650.065 2800.800 4757.500 0700.070 2850.850 4808.000 0750.075 2900.900 4858.500 0800.080 2950.950 4909.000 0850.085 4101.000 4959.500 0900.090 5121.250 610 10.000 0950.095 4151.500 71010.500 2100.100 517 1.750 611 11.000 2150.150 4202.000 71111.500 2200.200 5222.250 61212.000 2250.250 4252.500 71212.500 2300.300 5272.750 61313.000 OR VOLTAGE COIL (NORMAL RATED VOLTAGE) 7 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 35.000 640 40.000 65050.000 660 960.000 670 970.000 680 980.000 685 985.000 690 990.000 695 995.000 810 9100.00 A06 6 DC A12 12 DC A18 18 DC A24 24 DC J65 65 AC K20 120 AC L40 240 AC CODEAMPERES A32 32 DC A48 48 DC A65 65 DC J06 6 AC 8 TERMINAL 1 9 Stud 10-32 2 10 Screw 10-32 11 3 Stud 1/4-20 4 10 Stud M5 x 0.8 5 10 Screw M5 x 0.8 J12 J18 J24 J48 6 11 7 12 9 11 A 13 C 10 12 AC 18 AC 24 AC 48 AC Stud M6 0.250 Double Click Connect 7/16” Clip Terminal Plug-In Stud 5/16” Clip Terminal 9 LEGEND PLATE 0 No Legend 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS MOUNTING STYLE 1 Standard Hex Nut A Standard Hex Nut (multi-pole units only) BARRIERS no yes 11 AGENCY APPROVAL C UL Recognized & CSA Accepted I UL Recognized & CSA Accepted, UL1500 ignition protection L UL Recognized & CSA Accepted with listed construction 59 C-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker UL Recognized – Ordering Scheme C C 3 1 Series 2 Actuator 14 B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 450 6 Frequency & Delay 1 SERIES C 10 Mounting/ Barriers D 11 Agency Approval 2 Two 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 6 0 without Aux Switch 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 3 S.P.D.T., 0.139 Solder Lug 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 7 DC Instantaneous 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 7 50/60Hz Instantaneous 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 0200.020 2350.350 4303.000 0250.025 2400.400 4353.500 0300.030 2450.450 4404.000 0350.035 2500.500 4454.500 0400.040 2550.550 4505.000 0450.045 2600.600 4555.500 0500.050 2650.650 4606.000 0550.055 2700.700 4656.500 0600.060 2750.750 4707.000 0650.065 2800.800 4757.500 0700.070 2850.850 4808.000 0750.075 2900.900 4858.500 0800.080 2950.950 4909.000 0850.085 4101.000 4959.500 0900.090 5121.250 610 10.000 0950.095 4151.500 71010.500 2100.100 517 1.750 611 11.000 2150.150 4202.000 71111.500 2200.200 5222.250 61212.000 2250.250 4252.500 71212.500 2300.300 5272.750 61313.000 OR VOLTAGE COIL (NORMAL RATED VOLTAGE) 7 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 35.000 640 40.000 65050.000 660 960.000 670 970.000 680 980.000 685 985.000 690 990.000 695 995.000 810 9100.00 A06 6 DC A12 12 DC A18 18 DC A24 24 DC J65 65 AC K20 120 AC L40 240 AC CODEAMPERES 3 4 CIRCUIT F 4 A 3 Switch Only (No Coil) G 4 B Series Trip (Current) H 4,5 C Series Trip (Voltage) 4 D Shunt Trip (Current) K 4,5 E 4 Shunt Trip (Voltage) 6 8 9 Three Relay Trip (Current) Relay Trip (Voltage) Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Voltage Coil Dual Coil with Relay Trip Voltage Coil S.P.S.T., 0.139 Solder Lug S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 30 31 32 34 36 42 8 44 8 46 8 52 8 54 8 56 8 DC 50/60Hz Instantaneous DC 50/60Hz Ultra Short DC 50/60Hz Short DC 50/60Hz Medium DC 50/60Hz Long 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush DC Short, Hi-Inrush DC Medium, Hi-Inrush DC Long, Hi-Inrush Notes: 1 Push-To-Reset actuators have OFF portion of rocker shrouded. 2 Multi-pole breakers have all poles identical except when specifying Auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles, and have one rocker per breaker. Rocker location as viewed from front panel: 2 pole – left pole; 3 pole – center pole. 3 Switch Only circuits, rated up to 50 amps and 3 poles, and only available with VDE Certification when tied to a protected pole (Circuit Code B, C, D or H.), For .02 to 30 amps, select Current Code 630. For 35 - 50 amps, select Current Code 650. For 55-70 amps, select Current Code 670. For 75-100 amps, select Current Code 810. 4 Circuit Codes D,E,F,G,H & K available with Terminal Codes 1,2,4 & 5 only. Circuit Codes D,F,H & K available up to 50 amps maximum Current Rating. 5 Consult factory for available Dual Coil options, as special catalog number is required. Dual Coil Voltage Coils with Shunt Trip Construction trip instantaneously on line voltage. Dual Coil Voltage Coils require 30VA minimum power to trip instantaneously and are rated for intermittent duty only. 6 Auxiliary Switch available with Series Trip and Switch Only circuits. On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. Auxiliary switch codes 2, 3 & 4 are VDE approved. 7 Voltage coils not rated for continuous duty. Available only with delay codes 10 & 20. 8 Available with Circuit Codes B & D only, and up to 50 amps maximum. 9 Current Ratings 60-70 are available up to four poles maximum. Ratings 71-100 are available up to two poles maximum. 10 Terminal Code 1 available to 60 amps maximum. 11 Terminal Codes 2,4,5 & C available to 50 amps maximum. 12 Terminal Codes 3,6 & 9 available to 100 amps maximum. 13 Terminal Code 7 available to 25 amps maximum. 14 Terminal Code A available to 100 amps maximum. 15 Terminal Codes 7, 9 & C are not VDE approved. 16 Color shown is visi and legend with remainder of rocker black 17 Legend on Push-to-reset bezel/shroud is white when single color rocker is ordered. Dual = ON-OFF/I-O legend with actuator codes C - G, and J, K, N, O, R, & U. None = no legend with actuator codes H, L, P, V. Rockerguard available with actuator codes C - L. Push-to-reset available with actuator codes N, O, P, R, U, V. 18 VDE/TUV approval requires Dual (I-O, ON-OFF) or I-O markings on rocker. 19 VDE/TUV: 30 amps max.; UL/CSA: 50 amps max.; Available in 2 - 4 poles only and limited to AC Delays. “General Purpose amps” not rated for “full load amps” or to be used in applications with a motor. 60 9 Actuator Color CODEAMPERES 3 POLES 2 One 8 Terminal 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 2 ACTUATOR 1 Two Color Visi-Rocker C Indicate ON, vertical legend D Indicate ON, horizontal legend E Indicate ON, no legend F Indicate OFF, vertical legend G Indicate OFF, horizontal legend H Indicate OFF, no legend Push-To-Reset, Visi-Rocker N Indicate OFF,vertical legend O Indicate OFF,horizontal legend P Indicate OFF,no legend Single color J Vertical legend K Horizontal legend L No legend Push-To-Reset, Single color R Vertical legend U Horizontal legend V No legend 1 1 2 1 7 Current Rating A32 32 DC A48 48 DC A65 65 DC J06 6 AC 8 TERMINAL 1 10 Stud 10-32 2 11 Screw 10-32 3 12 Stud 1/4-20 4 11 Stud M5 x 0.8 5 11 Screw M5 x 0.8 J12 J18 J24 J48 12 AC 18 AC 24 AC 48 AC 6 12 Stud M6 7 13 0.250 Double Quick Connect 9 7/16” Clip Terminal A 14 Plug-In Stud C 5/16” Clip Terminal 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND 16,17,18 Actuator or Visi-Color Marking: Marking Color: Single Color Color: I-O ON-OFF Dual/None Rocker/Handle Visi-Rocker White A B 1 Black White Black C D 2 White n/a Red F G 3 White Red Green H J 4 White Green Blue K L 5 White Blue Yellow M N 6 Black Yellow Gray P Q 7 Black Gray Orange R S 8 Black Orange 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS 1 STANDARD ROCKER BEZEL 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches 2 6-32 x 0.195 inches 3 19 6-32 x 0.195 inches 4 ISO M3 x 5mm 5 ISO M3 x 5mm 6 19 ISO M3 x 5mm ROCKERGUARD BEZEL A 6-32 x 0.195 inches C 6-32 x 0.195 inches E 19 6-32 x 0.195 inches G ISO M3 x 5mm J ISO M3 x 5mm L 19 ISO M3 x 5mm PUSH-TO-RESET BEZEL B 6-32 x 0.195 inches D 6-32 x 0.195 inches 19 F 6-32 x 0.195 inches H ISO M3 x 5mm J ISO M3 x 5mm 19 M ISO M3 x 5mm BARRIERSVOLTAGE no <300 yes <300 yes ≥300 no <300 yes <300 yes ≥300 no yes yes no yes yes <300 <300 ≥300 <300 <300 ≥300 no yes yes no yes yes <300 <300 ≥300 <300 <300 ≥300 11 AGENCY APPROVAL C UL Recognized & CSA Accepted D VDE Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted E TUV Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted H UL489 Construction: VDE Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted I UL Recognized STD 1077, UL Recognized 1500 (ignition protected), & CSA Accepted L UL489 Construction: UL Recognized & CSA Accepted R UL489 Construction: TUV Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted www.carlingtech.com C-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker UL Listed – Ordering Scheme C C 3 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 14 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 6 Frequency & Delay 450 7 Current Rating Two Color Visi-Rocker C Indicate ON, vertical legend D Indicate ON, horizontal legend F Indicate OFF, vertical legend G Indicate OFF, horizontal legend 2100.100 2150.150 2200.200 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 2850.850 2900.900 Single color J Vertical legend K Horizontal legend ROCKER STYLE DESCRIPTIONS INDICATE "ON" VERTICAL STYLE K G 10 Mounting/ Barriers 11 Max. App. Rating 12 Agency Approval CODEAMPERES 2 ACTUATOR 1 INDICATE "OFF" SINGLE COLOR CODE "F" CODE "J" CODE "C" INDICATE COLOR LOCATION HORIZONTAL STYLE 9 Actuator Color 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 4 1 SERIES C LINE 1 2 A 8 Terminal LINE 3 POLES 1 1 One CODE "G" CODE "K" LINE 2 Two 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 2 0 without Aux Switch 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 3 S.P.D.T., 0.139 Solder Lug 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) 3 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 35.000 640 40.000 65050.000 660 60.000 670 70.000 680 80.000 685 85.000 690 90.000 695 95.000 810 100.00 6 8 9 S.P.S.T., 0.139 Solder Lug S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 42 8 44 8 46 8 52 8 54 8 56 6 7 9 7,8 A 7,8 C 6,8 Stud M6 7/16” Clip Terminal Plug-In Stud 5/16” Clip Terminal Three 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush DC Short, Hi-Inrush DC Medium, Hi-Inrush DC Long, Hi-Inrush Notes: 1 Multi-pole breakers have all breakers identical except when specifying Auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles, and have one rocker per breaker. 2 On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 3 Available up to 50 amps maximum. 4 Current ratings 71 - 100 with VDE approvals are available up to two poles maximum. 5 Terminal Code 1 available to 60 amps maximum. 6 Terminal Codes 2, 4, 5 & C available to 50 amps maximum. 7 Terminal Codes 3, 6, 9 & A available to 100 amps maximum. 8 Terminal Codes 9 & C are not VDE approved. 9 Color shown is visi and legend with remainder of rocker black 10 Dual = ON-OFF/I-O legend on actuator. 11 VDE and TUV approval requires Dual (I-O, ON-OFF) markings on rocker. 12 Rockerguard available with all actuator codes. 13 Barriers supplied on multi-pole units only. 14 2 & 3 pole circuit breakers required for 120/240 AC rating. www.carlingtech.com 8 TERMINAL 1 5 Stud 10-32 2 6 Screw 10-32 with saddle & washer clamps 3 7 Stud 1/4-20 4 6 Stud M5 x 0.8 5 6 Screw M5 x 0.8 with saddle & washer clamps LINE 4 CIRCUIT B Series Trip (current) 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 610 10.000 71010.500 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 LINE CODE "D" LINE 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 4151.500 517 1.750 4202.000 5222.250 4252.500 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND 11 Actuator or Visi-Color Marking: Marking Color: Single Color 10 Color: ON-OFF Dual Rocker/Handle White B 1 Black Black D 2 White Red G 3 White Green J 4 White Blue L 5 White Yellow N 6 Black Gray Q7 Black Orange S 8 Black 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS 12 Standard Rocker Bezel Threaded Insert, 2 per pole A 6-32 X 0.195 inches C ISO M3 x 5mm Rockerguard Bezel Threaded Insert, 2 per pole B 6-32 x 0.195 inches D ISO M3 x 5mm Visi-Rocker White n/a Red Green Blue Yellow Gray Orange BARRIERS 13 yes yes yes yes 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING A 65 DC B 125 DC C 120/240 AC 14 D 240 AC F 277 AC K 120 AC M 80 DC 12 AGENCY APPROVAL A without approvals F UL 489 Listed, CSA Certified, & VDE Certified G UL 489 Listed & CSA Certified J UL489 Listed, CSA Certified & TUV Certified 61 C-Series Circuit Breaker - Flat Rocker UL Recognized – Ordering Scheme C 1 2 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 10 450 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 10 Mounting/ Barriers E 11 Agency Approval CODEAMPERES 2 ACTUATOR 1 Two Color Visi-Rocker 1 Indicate OFF, vertical legend 2 Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Single color 3 Vertical legend 4 Horizontal legend Push-To-Reset, Visi-Rocker 5 Indicate OFF, vertical legend 6 Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Push-To-Reset , Single color 7 Vertical legend 8 Horizontal legend 2 Two 3 4 CIRCUIT F 4 A 3 Switch Only (No Coil) G 4 B Series Trip (Current) H 4,5 C Series Trip (Voltage) D 4 Shunt Trip (Current) K 4,5 E 4 Shunt Trip (Voltage) 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 6 0 without Aux Switch 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 3 S.P.D.T., 0.139 Solder Lug 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 7 DC Instantaneous 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 7 50/60Hz Instantaneous 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 6 8 9 Relay Trip (Current) Relay Trip (Voltage) Dual Coil with Shunt Trip Voltage Coil Dual Coil with Relay Trip Voltage Coil S.P.S.T., 0.139 Solder Lug S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 30 31 32 34 36 42 8 44 8 46 8 52 8 54 8 56 8 DC 50/60Hz Instantaneous DC 50/60Hz Ultra Short DC 50/60Hz Short DC 50/60Hz Medium DC 50/60Hz Long 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush DC Short, Hi-Inrush DC Medium, Hi-Inrush DC Long, Hi-Inrush 0200.020 2350.350 4303.000 0250.025 2400.400 4353.500 0300.030 2450.450 4404.000 0350.035 2500.500 4454.500 0400.040 2550.550 4505.000 0450.045 2600.600 4555.500 0500.050 2650.650 4606.000 0550.055 2700.700 4656.500 0600.060 2750.750 4707.000 0650.065 2800.800 4757.500 0700.070 2850.850 4808.000 0750.075 2900.900 4858.500 0800.080 2950.950 4909.000 0850.085 4101.000 4959.500 0900.090 5121.250 610 10.000 0950.095 4151.500 71010.500 2100.100 517 1.750 611 11.000 2150.150 4202.000 71111.500 2200.200 5222.250 61212.000 2250.250 4252.500 71212.500 2300.300 5272.750 61313.000 OR VOLTAGE COIL (NORMAL RATED VOLTAGE) 7 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 35.000 640 40.000 65050.000 660 960.000 670 970.000 680 980.000 685 985.000 690 990.000 695 995.000 810 9100.00 A06 6 DC A12 12 DC A18 18 DC A24 24 DC J65 65 AC K20 120 AC L40 240 AC CODEAMPERES Three Notes: 1 Push-to-reset actuators have OFF portion of rocker shrouded. 2 Multi-pole breakers have all poles identical except when specifying Auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles, and have one rocker per breaker. Rocker location as viewed from front panel: 2 pole – left pole; 3 pole – center pole. 3 Switch Only circuits, rated up to 50 amps and 3 poles, and only available with VDE Certification when tied to a protected pole (Circuit Code B, C, D or H.). For .02 to 30 amps, select Current Code 630. For 35 - 50 amps, select Current Code 650. For 55-70 amps, select Current Code 670. For 75-100 amps, select Current Code 810. 4 Circuit Codes D,E,F,G,H & K available with Terminal Codes 1,2,4 & 5 only. Circuit Codes D,F,H & K available up to 50 amps maximum Current Rating. 5 Consult factory for available Dual Coil options, as special catalog number is required. Dual Coil Voltage Coils with Shunt Trip Construction trip instantaneously on line voltage. Dual Coil Voltage Coils require 30VA minimum power to trip instantaneously and are rated for intermittent duty only. 6 Auxiliary Switch available with Series Trip and Switch Only circuits. On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. Auxilary switch codes 2, 3 & 4 are VDE approved. 7 Voltage coils not rated for continuous duty. Available only with delay codes 10 and 20. 8 Available with Circuit Codes B & D only, and up to 50 amps maximum. 9 Current ratings 60-70 are available up to four poles maximum. Current ratings 71 - 100 are available up to two poles maximum. 10 Terminal Code 1 available to 60 amps maximum. 11 Terminal Codes 2,4,5 & C available to 50 amps maximum. 12 Terminal Codes 3,6 & 9 available to 100 amps maximum. 13 Terminal Code 7 available to 25 amps maximum. 14 Terminal Code A available to 100 amps maximum. 15 Terminal Codes 7, 9 & C are not VDE approved. 16 Color shown is visi & legend with remainder of rocker black. Dual = ON-OFF/I-O legend. 17 Legend on Push-to-reset bezel/shroud is white with single color actuator codes 7 & 8. Legend on Push-to-reset bezel/shroud matches visi-color of rocker with actuator codes 5 & 6. 18 VDE/TUV approval requires Dual (I-O, ON-OFF) or I-O markings on rocker. 19 VDE/TUV: 30 amps max.; UL/CSA: 50 amps max.; Available in 2 & 3 poles only and limited to AC Delays. “General Purpose amps” not rated for “full load amps” or to be used in applications with a motor. 20 Recessed “OFF SIDE” available with actuator codes 1,2,3&4. Legends on rocker are available in ink stamping only. 62 9 Actuator Color 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 9 1 SERIES C 3 POLES 2 1 One 1 2 1 8 Terminal A32 32 DC A48 48 DC A65 65 DC J06 6 AC 8 TERMINAL 1 10 Stud 10-32 2 11 Screw 10-32 3 12 Stud 1/4-20 4 11 Stud M5 x 0.8 5 11 Screw M5 x 0.8 J12 J18 J24 J48 6 12 7 13 9 15 A 14 C 15 12 AC 18 AC 24 AC 48 AC Stud M6 0.250 Double Quick Connect 7/16” Clip Terminal Plug-In Stud 5/16” Clip Terminal 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND 16,17,18 Actuator or Visi-Color Marking: Marking Color: Single Color Color: I-O ON-OFF Dual/None Rocker/Handle Visi-Rocker White A B 1 Black White Black C D 2 White n/a Red F G 3 White Red Green H J 4 White Green Blue K L 5 White Blue Yellow M N 6 Black Yellow Gray P Q 7 Black Gray Orange R S 8 Black Orange 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS 1 STANDARD ROCKER BEZEL 1 6-32 x 0.195 inches 2 6-32 x 0.195 inches 19 3 6-32 x 0.195 inches 4 ISO M3 x 5mm 5 ISO M3 x 5mm 19 6 ISO M3 x 5mm RECESSED OFF ROCKER 7 6-32 x 0.195 inches 8 6-32 x 0.195 inches 9 6-32 x 0.195 inches A ISO M3 x 5mm C ISO M3 x 5mm E ISO M3 x 5mm PUSH-TO-RESET BEZEL B 6-32 x 0.195 inches D 6-32 x 0.195 inches F 19 6-32 x 0.195 inches H ISO M3 x 5mm J ISO M3 x 5mm M 19 ISO M3 x 5mm BARRIERSVOLTAGE no <300 yes <300 yes ≥300 no <300 yes <300 yes ≥300 no yes yes no yes yes <300 <300 ≥300 <300 <300 ≥300 no yes yes no yes yes <300 <300 ≥300 <300 <300 ≥300 11 AGENCY APPROVAL C UL Recognized & CSA Accepted E TUV Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted I UL Recognized STD 1077, UL Recognized 1500 (ignition protected), & CSA Accepted L UL489 Construction: UL Recognized & CSA Accepted R UL489 Construction: TUV Certified, UL Recognized & CSA Accepted www.carlingtech.com C-Series Circuit Breaker - Flat Rocker UL Listed – Ordering Scheme C 1 2 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 14 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 6 Frequency & Delay 450 7 Current Rating 1 2 A 8 Terminal 9 Actuator Color 11 Max. App. Rating 12 Agency Approval 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 5 1 SERIES C CODEAMPERES 2 ACTUATOR 1 Two Color Visi-Rocker 1 Indicate OFF, vertical legend 2 Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Single color 3 Vertical legend 4 Horizontal legend 2100.100 2150.150 2200.200 2250.250 2300.300 2350.350 2400.400 2450.450 2500.500 2550.550 2600.600 2650.650 2700.700 2750.750 2800.800 2850.850 2900.900 Push-To-Reset, Visi-Rocker 5 Indicate OFF, vertical legend 6 Indicate OFF, horizontal legend Push-To-Reset , Single color 7 Vertical legend 8 Horizontal legend 2950.950 4101.000 5121.250 4151.500 517 1.750 4202.000 5222.250 4252.500 5272.750 4303.000 4353.500 4404.000 4454.500 4505.000 4555.500 4606.000 4656.500 4707.000 4757.500 4808.000 4858.500 4909.000 4959.500 610 10.000 71010.500 611 11.000 71111.500 61212.000 71212.500 61313.000 61414.000 61515.000 61616.000 61717.000 8 TERMINAL 1 7 Stud 10-32 2 8 Screw 10-32 3 9 Stud 1/4-20 4 8 Stud M5 x 0.8 5 8 Screw M5 x 0.8 3 POLES 2 1 One K G 10 Mounting/ Barriers 2 Two 3 Three 4 CIRCUIT B Series Trip (current) 5 AUXILIARY / ALARM SWITCH 2 0 without Aux Switch 2 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. 3 S.P.D.T., 0.139 Solder Lug 4 S.P.D.T., 0.110 Q.C. Term. (Gold Contacts) 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 21 50/60Hz Ultra Short 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 6 8 9 S.P.S.T., 0.139 Solder Lug S.P.S.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. S.P.D.T., 0.187 Q.C. Term. 42 4 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 44 4 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 46 4 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush 52 4 DC Short, Hi-Inrush 54 4 DC Medium, Hi-Inrush 56 4 DC Long, Hi-Inrush 1 Notes: 2 Push-to-reset actuators have OFF portion of rocker shrouded. 3 Multi-pole breakers have all breakers identical except when specifying Auxiliary switch and/or mixed poles, and have one rocker per breaker. 4 On multi-pole breakers, one auxiliary switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole. 5 Available up to 50 amps maximum. 6 Current ratings 71 - 100 with VDE approvals are available up to two poles maximum. 7 Terminal Code 1 available to 60 amps maximum. 8 Terminal Codes 2, 4, 5 & C available to 50 amps maximum. 9 Terminal Codes 3, 6, 9 & A available to 100 amps maximum. 10 Terminal Codes 9 & C are not VDE approved. 11 Color shown is visi and legend with remainder of rocker black 12 Dual = ON-OFF/I-O legend on actuator. 13 VDE and TUV approval requires Dual (I-O, ON-OFF) markings on rocker. 14 Legend on push-to-reset bezel/shroud is white when single color rocker is ordered. Legend on push-to-reset bezel/shroud matches visi-color of rocker with actuator codes 15 5 & 6. 16 Recessed “OFF-SIDE” available with actuator codes 1, 2, 3, & 4. Legends on rocker are available in ink stamping only. 17 Barriers supplied on multi-pole units only. 18 2 & 3 pole circuit breakers required for 120/240 AC rating. www.carlingtech.com 6 9 9 9,10 A 9 C 8,10 Stud M6 7/16” Clip Terminal Plug-In Stud 5/16” Clip Terminal 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND 12 Actuator or Visi-Color Marking: Marking Color: Single Color 11 Color: ON-OFF Dual Rocker/Handle White B 1 Black Black D 2 White Red G 3 White Green J 4 White Blue L 5 White Yellow N 6 Black Gray Q7 Black Orange S 8 Black 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS 12 STANDARD ROCKER BEZEL Threaded Insert, 2 per pole A 6-32 X 0.195 inches C ISO M3 x 5mm RECESSED OFF ROCKER 14 Threaded Insert, 2 per pole E 6-32 x 0.195 inches F ISO M3 x 5mm PUSH-TO-RESET BEZEL 13 Threaded Insert, 2 per pole B 6-32 x 0.195 inches D ISO M3 x 5mm 61818.000 62020.000 62222.000 62424.000 62525.000 63030.000 635 35.000 640 40.000 65050.000 660 60.000 670 70.000 680 80.000 685 85.000 690 90.000 695 95.000 810 100.00 Visi-Rocker White n/a Red Green Blue Yellow Gray Orange BARRIERS 15 yes yes yes yes yes yes 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING A 65 DC B 125 DC C 120/240 AC 16 D 240 AC F 277 AC K 120 AC M 80 DC 12 AGENCY APPROVAL A without approvals G UL 489 Listed & CSA Certified J UL489 Listed, CSA Certified & TUV Certified 63 C-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Circuit & Terminal Diagrams Circuit & Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] .960 [24.38] .311 DIA [Ø7.90] .558 [14.17] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 3 Available on Series Trip and Switch Only Circuits when called for on multi-pole units. Only one auxiliary switch is normally supplied, as viewed in mulit-pole identification scheme. 64 www.carlingtech.com C-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Circuit & Terminal Diagrams Circuit & Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 3 Schematic shown represents current trip circuits. 4 Available only as special catalog number. www.carlingtech.com 65 C-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 66 www.carlingtech.com C-Series Circuit Breaker - Handleguard – Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 67 C-Series Circuit Breaker - Arc Chute Barrier UL Recognized/Listed – Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 Only 1-pole and 3-pole configurations shown. Arc chute (without barrier) and arc chute barrier also available for 2-pole construction. 2 Dimensions apply to all variations shown. 3 Notice that line and load terminal orientation for indicate on and indicate off rocker circuit breakers are opposite. 4 Screw type terminals shown for Rocker style (CF1, C11, etc) circuit breakers. For other terminal configurations see circuit and terminal diagrams. 5 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 6 Tolerance ± .020 unless otherwise specified. 7 Must be ordered under a special catalog number. 68 www.carlingtech.com C-Series Circuit Breaker - Sealed Toggle – Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 69 C-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker – Circuit & Terminal Diagrams Circuit & Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 3 Schematic shown represents current trip circuit. 70 www.carlingtech.com C-Series Circuit Breaker - Rocker – Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 Dimensions apply to all variations shown. Notice that circuit breaker line and load terminal orientation on indicate OFF is opposite of indicate ON. 2 For pole orientation with horizontal legend, rotate front view clockwise 90°. 3 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 4 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 71 C-Series Circuit Breaker - Flat Rocker – Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 For pole orientation with horizontal legend, rotate front view clockwise 90°. 2 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 3 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 72 www.carlingtech.com E-Series E-Series Circuit Breaker - Introduction E-Series CIRCUIT BREAKER The E-Series hydraulic-magnetic circuit breaker is ideally suited for higher current and voltage applications. It is UL listed and CSA certified for branch circuit protection, which does not require a fuse back up. It is also UL recognized and CSA certified as a supplementary protector and as a manual motor controller. Its physical features include front and back mounting, screw and stud terminals and heavy duty box wire connectors for solid wire or a pressure plate connector for standard wire. The E-series is available with handle actuators and can be configured as .1-125 amps, up to 600VAC or 125VDC, with choice of time delays, actuator colors and 1 to 6 poles configuration. Additionally, a Power Selector device is also available. Product Highlights: UL listed and CSA certified Certified for circuit branch protection Recognized as a supplementary protector and as a manual motor controller Optional power selector device www.carlingtech.com 73 E-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Maximum Voltage 600VAC 50/60 Hz, 125VDC (See Table A) Current Ratings Standard current coils: 0.100, 0.250, 0.500, 1.00, 2.50, 5.00, 7.50, 10.0, 15.0, 20.0, 25.0, 30.0, 50.0, 60.0, 70.0 & 100 Amp. Auxiliary Switch Rating SPDT; 10.1A 250VAC, 1.0A 65VDC; 0.5A 80VDC, 0.1A 125VAC (with gold contacts). Insulation Resistance Minimum of 100 Megohms at 500 VDC. Dielectric Strength UL, CSA: 2200 V 50/60 Hz for one minute between all electrically isolated terminals. E-Series Circuit Breakers comply with the 8mm spacing and 3750V 50/60 Hz dielectric requirements from hazardous voltage to operator accessible surfaces, between adjacent poles and from main circuits to auxiliary circuits per Publications EN 60950 and VDE 0805. Resistance, Impedance Values from Line to Load Terminal - based on Series Trip Circuit Breaker. CURRENT TOLERANCE (AMPS) (%) 0.10 - 5.0 5.1 - 20.0 ± 15 ± 25 20.1 - 50.0 ± 35 Mechanical Endurance 10,000 ON-OFF operations @ 6 per minute; with rated Current and Voltage. Trip Free All E-Series Circuit Breakers will trip on overload, even when Handle is forcibly held in the ON position. Trip Indication The operating Handle moves positively to the OFF position when an overload causes the breaker to trip. Physical Number of Poles Mounting Connectors, Box Type Internal Circuit Configuration Weight Standard Colors 1-6 A 3” minimum spacing must be provided between the circuit breaker arc venting area on back connected E-Series circuit breakers and grounded obstructions. E-Series circuit breakers must be mounted on a vertical surface. Front connected E-Series circuit breakers are supplied with box type pressure connectors that accept copper or aluminum conductors as follows: 1/0-14 Copper, 1/0-12 Aluminum. Series and Switch Only, (with or without auxiliary switch). Shunt with current coils. Approximately 252 grams/pole (Approximately 9 ounces/pole) Housing-Black; Actuator - See Ordering Scheme. Environmental Designed in accordance with requirements of specification MIL PRF-55629 & MIL-STD-202G as follows: Pulse Tolerance Curves Time Delay Curves 62, 64 & 66 (100 Amps Max.) Time Delay Curves 22, 24 & 26 (100 Amps Max.) Shock Withstands 100 Gs, 6ms, sawtooth while carrying rated current per Method 213, Test Condition “I”. Vibration Withstands 0.060” excursion from 10-55 Hz, and 10 Gs 55-500 Hz, at rated current per Method 204C, Test Condition A. Moisture Resistance Method 106D, i.e., ten 24-hour cycles @ + 25°C to +65°C, 80-98% RH. Salt Spray Method 101, Condition A (90-95% RH @ 5% NaCl Solution, 96 hrs). Thermal Shock Method 107D, Condition A (Five cycles @ -55°C to +25°C to +85°C to +25°C). Operating Temperature -40° C to +85° C *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 74 www.carlingtech.com E-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table A: Lists UL Listed (489) & CSA Certified (C22.2 No. 5) configurations & performance capabilities as a Molded Case Circuit Breaker. E SERIES TABLE A : UL489 LISTED BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS VOLTAGE CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION SERIES CURRENT RATING MAX. RATING FREQUENCY PHASE FULL LOAD AMPS INTERRUPTING CAPACITY (AMPS) HIGH INTERRUPTING CAPACITY WITHOUT BACKUP (AMPS) FUSE 80 DC --- 0.10 - 100 5,000 50,000 125 DC --- 0.10 - 100 5,000 10,000 125 DC --- 0.10 - 125 10,000 --- 120 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 125 10,000 --- 240 240 50 / 60 50 / 60 1 1 0.10 - 30 31 - 100 5,000 5,000 10,000 120 / 240 50 / 60 1 0.10 - 30 5,000 10,000 120 / 240 50 / 60 1 31 - 100 5,000 --- 120 / 240 50 / 60 1 101 - 125 10,000 --- 240 50 / 60 3 0.10 - 100 5,000 --- Table B: Lists UL Recognized & CSA Accepted configurations & performance capabilities as a Component Supplementary Protector. E -SERIES TABLE B: COMPONENT SUPPLEMENTARY PROTECTORS CURRENT RATING SHORT CIRCUIT CAPACITY (AMPS) UL/CSA FULL LOAD GENERAL FREQUENCY PHASE WITH BACKUP WITHOUT AMPS PURPOSE AMPS FUSE3 BACKUP FUSE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION MAX. RATING APPLICATION CODES UL CSA 125 DC --- 0.02 - 100 --- --- 5,000 TC1,2, OL1, U1 TC1,2, OL1, U1 125 150 DC DC ----- ----- 101 - 120 0.02 - 125 ----- 5,000 5,000 TC1,2, OL0, U1 TC1,2, OL0, U1 TC1, OL0, U3 TC1, OL0, U3 160 150 / 300 DC DC ----- 0.02 - 100 0.02 - 100 ----- ----- 5,000 5,000 TC1,2, OL1, U1 TC1,2, OL1, U1 TC1,2, OL1, U1 TC1,2, OL1, U1 SERIES & 120 / 240 50 / 60 1 --- 0.02 - 100 --- 5,000 TC1,2, OL0, U1 TC1,2, OL0, U1 SHUNT 240 250 50 / 60 50 / 60 1 1 0.02 - 100 0.02 - 100 ----- --10,000 5,000 --- TC1,2, OL1, U1 TC1,2, OL1, U1 TC1,2, OL1, C1 TC1,2, OL1, C1 277 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 100 --- --10,000 5,000 --- TC1,2, OL1, U1 TC1,2, OL1, U1 TC1,2, OL1, C1 TC1,2, OL1, C1 480 50 / 60 50 / 60 50 / 60 1&3 1&3 1&3 0.02 - 100 0.02 - 50 0.02 - 100 ------- 10,000 10,000 10,000 ------- TC1,2, OL1, C1 TC1,2, OL1, C1 TC1,2, OL1, C1 TC1,2, OL1, C1 TC1,2, OL1, C1 TC1,2, OL1, C1 DC --- --- 0.02 - 125 --- 5,000 DC --- 0.02 - 120 160 DC --- 0.02 - 100 240 277 50 / 60 50 / 60 1 1 0.02 - 100 0.02 - 100 480 600 50 / 60 50 / 60 1&3 1&3 0.02 - 100 0.02 - 100 480 1 600 600 2 125 SWITCH ONLY TC1, OL0, U3 TC1, OL0, U3 Notes: 1 Per pole opposite polarity rating - Delta Configuration. 2 4 Poles connected in series 3 Requires branch circuit backup with a UL Listed Type K5 or RK5 fuse rated 15A minimum and no more than 4 times full load amp rating and not to exceed 225A. www.carlingtech.com 75 E-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Tables Table C: Lists UL Recognized, CSA Accepted and VDE Certified configurations and performance capabilities as a Component Supplementary Protector. E -SERIES TABLE C: COMPONENT SUPPLEMENTARY PROTECTORS WITH VDE CURRENT RATING VOLTAGE CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION SHORT CIRCUIT CAPACITY (AMPS) UL/CSA MAX. FREQUENCY PHASE FULL LOAD AMPS WITH BACKUP RATING FUSE1 125 DC --- 0.1 - 100 --- WITHOUT BACKUP FUSE WITHOUT BACKUP FUSE 5,000 5,000 SERIES & 240 50 / 60 1&3 0.1 - 100 --- 5,000 5,000 SHUNT 415 50 / 60 1&3 0.1 - 100 10,000 --- 4,000 SWITCH ONLY 125 DC --- 0.1 - 125 240 50 / 60 1&3 0.1 - 100 415 50 / 60 1&3 0.1 - 100 APPLICATION CODES VDE (Icn) UL CONSTRUCTION NOTES CSA TC1,2, OL1, U1 TC1,2, OL1, U1 1 or 2 Poles 1 - 5 Poles. Up to 4 TC1,2, OL1, U1 TC1,2, OL1, U1 Current Poles, 1 Voltage Pole 2 - 5 Poles. Up to 4 TC1,2, OL1, C1 TC1,2, OL1, C1 Current Poles, 1 Voltage Pole Notes: 1 Requires branch circuit backup with a UL LISTED Type K5 or RK5 fuse rated 15A minimum and no more than 4 times full load amp rating and not to exceed 225 amps. Table D: Lists UL Recognized, CSA Accepted configurations and performance capabilities as Protectors, Supplementary for Marine Electrical and Fuel Systems (Guide PEQZ2, File E75596). Ignition Protected per UL 1500. UL Classified Small Craft Electrical Devices, Marine in accordance with ISO 8846 (Guide UZMK, File MQ1515) as Marine Supplementary Protectors. E SERIES TABLE D : UL1500 (Marine Ignition Protection) VOLTAGE CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION SERIES MAX. RATING FREQUENCY CURRENT RATING SHORT CIRCUIT CAPACITY (AMPS) FULL LOAD AMPS WITHOUT BACKUP FUSE UL CSA PHASE 65 DC --- 0.02 - 100 5,000 TC1,2,OL1,U1 TC1,2,OL1,U1 125 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 100 1,500 TC1,2,OL1,U1 TC1,2,OL1,U1 250 50 / 60 1 0.02 - 100 1,500 TC1,2,OL1,U1 TC1,2,OL1,U1 Agency Certifications UL Recognized UL Standard 1077 UL Standard 1500 UL Listed UL Standard 489 76 APPLICATION CODES Component Recognition Program as Protectors, Supplementary (Guide QVNU2, File E75596) CSA Accepted Component Supplementary Protector (Class 3215 30, File 047848 0 000) CSA Standard C22.2 No. 235 Component Recognition Program as Manual Motor Controls (Guide NLRV2, File E135367) CSA Certified Circuit Breaker Molded Case (Class 1432 01, File 093910), CSA Standard C22.2 No. 5.1 - M Protectors, Supplementary for Marine Electrical & Fuel Systems (Guide PEQZ2, File E75596) Ignition Protection TUV Certified EN60934 under License No. R72031056 VDE Certified EN60934, VDE 0642 under File No. 10537 Circuit Breakers, Molded Case (Guide DIVQ, File E129899) www.carlingtech.com E-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle UL Recognized – Ordering Scheme E A 2 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Auxiliary Switch 24 450 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating 2 ACTUATOR A Handle, one per pole 3Three 4Four 4 CIRCUIT 2 A 3 Switch Only (no coil) B Series Trip (current) C Series Trip (voltage) D Shunt Trip (current) 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 3 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 5 DC Instantaneous 12 DC Short 14 DC Medium 16 DC Long 20 5 50/60Hz Instantaneous 22 50/60Hz Short 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 30 DC, 50/60Hz Instantaneous 32 DC, 50/60Hz Short E F G Shunt Trip (voltage) Relay Trip (current) Relay Trip (voltage) S.P.S.T. 0.110 Q.C. Terminals S.P.S.T. 0.110 Q.C. Terminals (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T. 0.187 Q.C. Terminals S.P.D.T. 0.187 Q.C. Terminals 34 DC, 50/60Hz Medium 36 DC, 50/60Hz Long 62 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 64 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 66 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush 72 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 74 DC,Medium, Hi-Inrush 76 DC, Long, Hi-Inrush 92 6DC, 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 94 6DC, 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 96 6DC, 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush 11 Maximum Application Rating 0.350 0.400 0.450 0.500 0.550 0.600 0.650 0.700 0.750 0.800 0.850 0.900 0.950 1.000 1.250 1.500 1.750 2.000 2.250 2.500 2.750 430 435 440 445 450 455 460 465 470 475 480 485 490 495 610 710 611 711 612 712 613 3.000 3.500 4.000 4.500 5.000 5.500 6.000 6.500 7.000 7.500 8.000 8.500 9.000 9.500 10.000 10.500 11.000 11.500 12.000 12.500 13.000 OR VOLTAGE COIL (MIN. TRIP RATING, VOLTS) 5 A06 6 DC, 5 DC A65 65 DC, 55 DC J48 A12 12 DC, 10 DC B25 125 DC, 100 DC J65 A18 18 DC, 15 DC J06 6 AC, 5 AC K20 A24 24 DC, 20 DC J12 12 AC, 10 AC L40 A32 32 DC, 25 DC J18 18 AC, 15 AC A48 48 DC, 40 DC J24 24 AC, 20 AC 614 615 616 617 618 620 622 624 625 630 635 640 650 660 670 680 690 810 811 812 912 8 14.000 15.000 16.000 17.000 18.000 20.000 22.000 24.000 25.000 30.000 35.000 40.000 50.000 60.000 70.000 80.000 90.000 100.000 110.000 120.000 125.000 48 AC, 40 AC 65 AC, 55 AC 120 AC, 65 AC 240 AC, 130 AC Notes: 1 VDE approval on 1-5 poles only. Standard multi-pole units identical poles except when specifying auxiliary switch - (see Note 4). For mixed ratings, consult factory. 2 Switch Only & Series Trip construction available with either front or back connected terminals. Shunt construction available with back connected terminals, (Terminal Codes 1 & 2) only. Circuit Codes B,C & D are VDE approved. 3 Switch Only construction: 30 amps or less select Current Rating Code 630; 31-70 amps, select Current Rating code 670; 71-100 amps, select Current Rating Code 810; 101-125 amps Select Current Rating Code 912. Switch Only is VDE approved only if tied to a protected pole. www.carlingtech.com 12 Agency Approval MAX. RATING 50 A 120 A 50 A 100 A Dual Legend Color 1Black 2White 3White 4White 5White 6Black 7Black 8Black 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS BACK CONNECTED (FRONT MOUNTED ONLY) Mounting Inserts A6-32 B ISO M3 CODEAMPERES 235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275 280 285 290 295 410 512 415 517 420 522 425 527 10 Mounting/ Barriers 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND 13 Actuator Color I-O ON-OFF White AB Black CD Red FG Green HJ Blue KL Yellow MN Gray PQ Orange RS 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 7 0.020 0.025 0.030 0.035 0.040 0.045 0.050 0.055 0.060 0.065 0.070 0.075 0.080 0.085 0.090 0.095 0.100 0.150 0.200 0.250 0.300 9 Actuator Color FRONT CONNECTED (BACK MOUNTED ONLY) MAX. RATING 3 10 Box Wire Connector (Line & Load) 100 A 11 C Box Wire Connector with Pressure Plate (Line & Load) 100 A 4 10-32 Screw (Line & Load) 50 A D M5 Screw (Line & Load) 50 A 5 10-32 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), 10-32 Screw (Load) 50 A E M5 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), 10-32 Screw (Load) 50 A 6 10 10-32 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), Box Wire Connector (Load) 100 A F 11 10-32 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), Box Wire Connector with Pressure Plate (Load) 100 A 7 1/4-20 Screw (Line & Load) 100 A G M6 Screw (Line & Load) 100 A 8 1/4-20 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), 1/4-20 Screw (Load) 100 A H M6 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), M6 Screw (Load) 100 A 10 9 1/4-20 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), Box Wire Connector (Load) 100 A J 11 1/4-20 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), Box Wire Connector with Pressure Plate (Load) 100 A 5Five 6Six 5 AUXILIARY SWITCH 4 0 without Auxiliary Switch 6 2 S.P.D.T. 0.110 Q.C. Terminals 7 3 S.P.D.T. 0.139 Solder Lug 4 S.P.D.T. 0.110 Q.C. Terminals 8 (Gold Contacts) 9 020 025 030 035 040 045 050 055 060 065 070 075 080 085 090 090 210 215 220 225 230 8 Terminal C B 8 TERMINAL 12 BACK CONNECTED (FRONT MOUNTED ONLY) 1 9 10-32 Stud (All Terminals) 2 9 1/4-20 Stud (All Terminals) A 9 M5 Stud (Line & Load) B 9 M6 Stud (Line & Load) 1 SERIES E 3 POLES 1 1 One 2Two 1 2 A FRONT CONNECTED (BACK MOUNTED ONLY) 14 Back Mounting Foot Type Front Mounting Inserts (Optional Use) CShort 6-32 D Short ISO M3 ELong 6-32 F Long ISO M3 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING 15 A 65 VDC, 120 A G 16 B 125 VDC, 120 A H 16 C 120/240 VAC, 100 A J 16 D 240 VAC, 100 A L 16 E 16 277/480 VAC, 100 A T F 277 VAC, 100 A W 16 600 VAC, 100 A 480 VAC, 100 A 415 VAC, 100 A 160 VDC, 100 A 125 VDC/240 VAC, 100 A 125 VDC/415 VAC, 100 A 12 AGENCY APPROVAL B UL 1077 / UL508 Recognized & CSA Accepted D UL 1077 Recognized, CSA Accepted, & VDE Certified 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Auxiliary Switch available on Switch Only and Series Trip units. On multi-pole units, only one auxiliary switch is normally supplied mounted in the extreme right pole. Back mounted units require special mounting provisions when auxiliary switch is specified. VDE approval on Auxilary Switch Codes 0,2,3 & 4 only. Voltage Trip Coils are not rated for continuous duty. Available only with Frequency & Delay Codes 10 & 20. Series Trip construction with a voltage coil s VDE approved only if tied to a protected pole. Frequency & Delay Codes 92,94 & 96 are not VDE Certified. Current Coil Ratings 0.100 - 100 ams are VDE Certified. 125 A rating (Code 912) available as a Switch Only (Circuit Code A), rated 125 VDC (Code B). An Anti-Flash Over Barrier is supplied between poles on multi-pole units with 10-32 (Terminal Code 1). 1/4-20 (Code 2), M5 (Code A), and M6 (Code B) terminals per UL requirement. Box Wire Connector will accept #14 through 0 AWG. copper wire or #12 through 0 AWG. aluminum wire. Box Wire Connector with Pressure Plate for stranded wire, consult factory for details. Terminal Codes A,B,D,E,G & H are not VDE Certified. VDE approvals require Dual (I-O, ON-OFF) or I-O markings on all handles. Back Mounted breakers can also be front mounted by utilizing the proper front panel mounting inserts normally supplied. However, terminal connections must be made prior to mounting. Application ratings B,D,J,T & W are available with VDE. 415, 480 & 600 VAC ratings require 3 or 4 pole break 3Ø and 2 pole break 1Ø. 77 E-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle UL Listed – Ordering Scheme E A 2 1 Series 2 Actuator 24 450 6 Frequency & Delay 7 Current Rating B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 5 Auxiliary Switch 2 ACTUATOR A Handle, one per pole 3 POLES 1 1 One 2Two 3Three 4Four 5Five 6Six 4 CIRCUIT 2 B Series Trip (current) C 3 Series Trip (voltage) 5 AUXILIARY SWITCH 4 0 without Auxiliary Switch 6 2 S.P.D.T. 0.110 Q.C. Terminals 7 3 S.P.D.T. 0.139 Solder Lug 4 S.P.D.T. 0.110 Q.C. Terminals 8 (Gold Contacts) 9 S.P.S.T. 0.110 Q.C. Terminals S.P.S.T. 0.110 Q.C. Terminals (Gold Contacts) S.P.S.T. 0.187 Q.C. Terminals S.P.D.T. 0.187 Q.C. Terminals 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 10 5 DC Instantaneous 62 50/60Hz Short, Hi-Inrush 12 DC Short 64 50/60Hz Medium, Hi-Inrush 14 DC Medium 66 50/60Hz Long, Hi-Inrush 16 DC Long 72 DC, Short,Hi-Inrush 20 5 50/60Hz Instantaneous 74 DC,Medium, Hi-Inrush 22 50/60Hz Short 76 DC, Long, Hi-Inrush 24 50/60Hz Medium 26 50/60Hz Long 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) 7 CODEAMPERES 0.020 0.025 0.030 0.035 0.040 0.045 0.050 0.055 0.060 0.065 0.070 0.075 0.080 0.085 0.090 0.095 0.100 0.150 0.200 0.250 0.300 235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275 280 285 290 295 410 512 415 517 420 522 425 527 0.350 0.400 0.450 0.500 0.550 0.600 0.650 0.700 0.750 0.800 0.850 0.900 0.950 1.000 1.250 1.500 1.750 2.000 2.250 2.500 2.750 430 435 440 445 450 455 460 465 470 475 480 485 490 495 610 710 611 711 612 712 613 3.000 3.500 4.000 4.500 5.000 5.500 6.000 6.500 7.000 7.500 8.000 8.500 9.000 9.500 10.000 10.500 11.000 11.500 12.000 12.500 13.000 OR VOLTAGE COIL (MIN. TRIP RATING, VOLTS) 5 A06 6 DC, 5 DC A65 65 DC, 55 DC J48 A12 12 DC, 10 DC B25 125 DC, 100 DC J65 A18 18 DC, 15 DC J06 6 AC, 5 AC K20 A24 24 DC, 20 DC J12 12 AC, 10 AC L40 A32 32 DC, 25 DC J18 18 AC, 15 AC A48 48 DC, 40 DC J24 24 AC, 20 AC 78 9 Actuator Color 10 Mounting/ Barriers 8 TERMINAL 7 BACK CONNECTED (FRONT MOUNTED ONLY) 1 8 10-32 Stud (All Terminals) 2 8 1/4-20 Stud (All Terminals) 1 SERIES E 020 025 030 035 040 045 050 055 060 065 070 075 080 085 090 090 210 215 220 225 230 1 2 A 8 Terminal 614 615 616 617 618 620 622 624 625 630 635 640 650 660 670 680 690 810 811 812 912 8 14.000 15.000 16.000 17.000 18.000 20.000 22.000 24.000 25.000 30.000 35.000 40.000 50.000 60.000 70.000 80.000 90.000 100.000 110.000 120.000 125.000 48 AC, 40 AC 65 AC, 55 AC 120 AC, 65 AC 240 AC, 130 AC C C 11 Maximum Application Rating 12 Agency Approval MAX. RATING 50 A 125 A FRONT CONNECTED (BACK MOUNTED ONLY) MAX. RATING 3 9 Box Wire Connector (Line & Load) 100 A C 10 Box Wire Connector with Pressure Plate (Line & Load) 100 A 4 10-32 Screw (Line & Load) 50 A 5 10-32 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), 10-32 Screw (Load) 50 A 6 9 10-32 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), Box Wire Connector (Load) 100 A F 10 10-32 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), Box Wire Connector with Pressure Plate (Load) 100 A 7 1/4-20 Screw (Line & Load) 125 A 8 1/4-20 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), 1/4-20 Screw (Load) 100 A 9 9 1/4-20 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), Box Wire Connector (Load) 100 A J 10 1/4-20 “Bus-Type” Screw (Line), Box Wire Connector with Pressure Plate (Load) 100 A 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND 12 Actuator Color ON-OFF Dual Legend Color White B1Black Black D2White Red G3White Green J4White Blue L5White Yellow N6Black Gray Q7Black Orange S8Black 10 MOUNTING / BARRIERS BACK CONNECTED (FRONT MOUNTED ONLY) Mounting Inserts A6-32 B ISO M3 FRONT CONNECTED (BACK MOUNTED ONLY) 11 Back Mounting Foot Type Front Mounting Inserts (Optional Use) CShort 6-32 D Short ISO M3 ELong 6-32 F Long ISO M3 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING 15 1 120 VAC B 125 VDC, 120 A 13 C 120/240 VAC, 100 A D 240 VAC, 100 A 12 AGENCY APPROVAL C UL 489 Listed & CSA Certified F UL 489 Listed, CSA Certified, & VDE Certified Notes: 1 Standard multi-pole units identical poles except when specifying auxiliary switch (see Note 4). For mixed ratings, consult factory. VDE Certification on 1-5 poles only. 2 Series Trip construction available with either front or back connected terminals. 3 Series Trip construction with a voltage coil is not available as a single pole unit and must be tied to a protected pole. 4 On multi-pole units, only one auxiliary switch is normally supplied mounted in the extreme right pole per Figure A. Back mounted units require special mounting provisions when auxiliary switch is specified. VDE Certification on auxilary switch codes 0, 2, 3 & 4 only. 5 Voltage Trip Coils are not rated for continuous duty. Available only with Frequency & Delay Codes 10 & 20. 6 Frequency & Delay Codes 92, 94 & 96 are not VDE Certified. 7 Current Ratings under 0.100 amps are not VDE Certified . 8 An Anti-Flash Over Barrier is supplied between poles on multi-pole units with 10-32 Stud (Terminal Code 1) or 1/4-20 Stud (Code 2) terminals per UL requirement. 9 Box Wire Connector will accept #14 through 0 AWG. copper wire or #12 through 0 AWG. aluminum wire. 10 Box Wire Connector with Pressure Plate for stranded wire, consult factory for details. 11 Back Mounted breakers can also be front mounted by utilizing the proper front panel mounting inserts normally supplied. However, terminal connections must be made prior to mounting. 12 VDE Certification requires dual (I-O , ON-OFF) markings on all handles. 13 Not available with VDE Certification. www.carlingtech.com E-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Circuit & Terminal Diagrams Circuit & Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 3 0-50 amps: 10-32 & M5 Studs .625±.062/15.88±1.574 long. 4 51-120 amps: 1/4-20 & M6 Studs .750±.062/19.05±1.574 long. www.carlingtech.com 79 E-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle (Back Connected) – Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 1/4 -20 stud terminal in Series Trip circuit configuration shown. 2 A 3” min spacing must be provided between the circuit breaker arc venting area of back connected E-Series circuit breaker and grounded obstructions. 3 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 4 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 5 Circuit breakers must be mounted on vertical surface. 80 www.carlingtech.com E-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle (Front Connected) – Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 3 Box wire connector terminal in Series Trip circuit configuration shown. 4 Circuit breakers must be mounted on vertical surface. www.carlingtech.com 81 F-Series F-Series Circuit Breaker - Introduction F-Series CIRCUIT BREAKER The F-Series hydraulic-magnetic high amperage circuit breakers are designed to handle high current applications in extremely hot and/or cold locations. Due to its time-proven hydraulic-magnetic design, the F-Series load sensing mechanism is insensitive to changes in ambient or enclosure temperature, providing a consistent trip point over temperatures ranging from -40°C to +85°C. Additionally, the F-Series circuit breakers come with a choice of overload time delays, making them ideal for critical applications having inductive loads. Further, the F-Series breakers are available up to 700A and an optional 25 millivolt metering shunt construction provides a safe method for monitoring current flowing through the breaker by simply connecting a meter with light gauge wire to the appropriate terminals located on the shunt housing at the rear of the breaker. Applications can be customized by measuring and displaying percentage of current, watts or safe/danger zones. Product Highlights: AC ratings to UL 489 DC voltage ratings up to 700A with metering shunt section Consistent trip point over temperatures ranging from -40°C to +85°C Optional 25 millivolt metering shunt construction 82 www.carlingtech.com F-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Electrical Maximum Voltage 125VDC, 277VAC Current Ratings Standard current coils: 100, 125, 150, 175, 225, 250 amps. 300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 700 amps available as parallel pole construction. Auxiliary Switch Rating SPDT; 10.1 Amps @ 250VAC, 1.0 Amps @ 65VDC, 0.5 Amps @ 80VDC 0.1 Amps @ 125VAC (with gold contacts). Insulation Resistance Minimum: 100 Megohms at 500 VDC Dielectric Strength 1960 VAC, 50/60 Hz for one minute between all electrically isolated terminals, except 2500 VAC for one minute between alarm/aux. switch and main terminals with contacts in open and closed position. F-Series circuit breakers comply with the 8mm spacing & 3750VAC 50/60 Hz dielectric requirements from hazardous voltage to operator accessible surfaces, between adjacent poles and from main circuits to auxilary circuits per Publications EN 60950 and VDE 0805. Resistance, Impedance Values from Line to Load Terminal - based on Series Trip Circuit Breaker. RESISTANCE PER POLE VALUES from Line to Load Terminals (Values Based on Series Trip Circuit Breaker) CURRENT TOLERANCE (AMPS) (%) 100 - 700 50 Mechanical Endurance 4000 ON-OFF operations with rated Current & Voltage & 4000 operations with no load (8000 operations total) @ 5 per minute. Parallel Pole construction: 1000 operations with rated Current and Voltage @ 5 per minute. Trip Free All F-Series Circuit Breakers will trip on overload, even when the actuator is forcibly held in the ON position. Trip Indication The operating actuator moves positively to the OFF position when an overload causes the circuit breaker to trip. Physical Number of Poles 1 - 3 Poles Note: Ratings over 250 Amps only available with parallel pole. Internal Circuit Config. Series (with or without auxiliary switch), Switch Only (with or without auxiliary switch). Available Accessories Factory installed: DC Current Metering Shunt (25 mV @lr) Weight Varies depending on construction. Consult factory. Standard Colors Housing - Black; Actuator- Black or White with contrasting ON-OFF legend. Environmental Designed and tested in accordance with requirements of specification MIL-PRF-55629 & MIL-STD-202 as follows: Shock Withstands 100 Gs, 6ms, sawtooth while carrying rated current per Method 213, Test Condition “I”. Instantaneous and ultra-short curves tested @ 90% of rated current. Vibration Withstands 0.060” excursion from 10-55 Hz, and 10 Gs 55-500 Hz, at rated current per Method 204C, Test Condition A. Instantaneous and ultrashort curves tested at 90% of rated current. Moisture Resistance Method 106D; ten 24-hour cycles @ + 25°C to +65°C, 80-98% RH.56 days @ +85°C, 85% RH. Salt Spray Method 101, Condition A (90-95% RH @ 5% NaCl Solution, 96 hrs). Thermal Shock Method 107D, Condition A (Five cycles @ -55°C to +25°C to +85°C to +25°C). Operating Temperature -40° C to +85° C *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 83 F-Series Circuit Breaker - General Specifications Table A: Lists ULTables Listed (489)and CSA Certified (C22.2 N0. 5.1-M) configurations and performance Electrical capabilities as a Molded Case Circuit Brekaer Table A: Lists UL Listed (489)and CSA Certified (C22.2 N0. 5.1-M) configurations and performance capabilities as a Molded Case Circuit Breaker F SERIES TABLE A : UL489 LISTED BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS VOLTAGE CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION SERIES MAX RATING CURRENT RATING FREQUENCY PHASE INTERRUPTING CAPACITY (AMPS) FULL LOAD AMPS UL / CSA 1 - 3 POLES TUV 2 1 or 2 POLES 125 DC --- 50 - 250 50,000 25,000 120 / 240 1 277 50 / 60 50 / 60 1 1 100 - 250 100 - 250 10,000 10,000 ----- 208Y / 120 50 / 60 3 100 - 250 10,000 --- Notes: NOTES: 1 120/240V rating available in 2 or 3 poles. In a 3 pole construction the center pole is Neutral. TUV constructions not availablein with and 150-250 ratings only. 1.2 120/240V ratingareavailable 2 AC orratings 3 poles. In a 3amp pole construction the center pole is Neutral. 2. TUV constructions are not available with AC ratings. Table B: Lists UL Listed configurations and performance capabilities as Circuit Breakers for use in Communications Equipment (Guide DITT, File E189195), under UL489A Agency Certifications UL Listed UL 489 UL 489A 84 Circuit Breakers , Molded Case (Guide DIVQ, File E129899) Complies with the requirements of the CSA Standard for Molded Case Circuit Breakers, CANCSA- C22.2 No. 5.1 –M Circuit Breakers for Use in Communications Equipment (Guide DITT, File E189195) TUV Certified IEC 60947-2 Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear under TUV License No. R72031058 www.carlingtech.com F-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Ordering Scheme F A 2 1 Series 2 Actuator B 0 4 Circuit 3 Poles 14 5 Aux/Alarm Switch 6 Frequency & Delay 2 ACTUATOR A Handle, one per pole S Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole T Mid-Trip Handle, one per pole & Alarm Switch 2 4 CIRCUIT A 1 Switch Only (no coil) B Series Trip (current) C 2 Series Trip (voltage) Two 3 DC Medium DC Long AC Short AC Medium AC Long 7 CURRENT RATING (AMPERES) CODEAMPERES 810 912 815 917 100.000 125.00 150.00 175.00 820 200.00 922225.00 825 250.00 830 8 300.00 835 8350.00 840 8 400.00 845 8 450.00 850 8 500.00 860 8 600.00 870 8 700.00 OR VOLTAGE COIL (MIN. TRIP RATING, VOLTS) 7 CODEAMPERES A06 6 DC, 5 DC A12 12 DC, 10 DC A18 18 DC, 15 DC A24 24 DC, 20 DC A32 32 DC, 25 DC A48 48 DC, 40 DC 8 TERMINAL Back Connected (Front Mounted Only) 1 9 3/8-16 Stud 2 14 3/8-16 Screw, Line & Load 5 14 3/8-16 Short Stud Front Connected (Back Mounted Only) 11 3 Box Wire Connector, Line & Load 4 14 3/8-16 Screw, Line & Load www.carlingtech.com 10 Mounting Dual 1 2 B G 11 Max. App. Rating 12 Agency Approval Marking Color Black White Back Mounting Inserts 10-32 screw clearance holes 10-32 screw clearance holes Three 5 AUXILIARY SWITCH 5 0 without Auxiliary Switch 7 S.P.S.T. 0.110 Q.C. Terminals 2 S.P.D.T. 0.110 Q.C. Terminals (Gold Contacts) 3 S.P.D.T. 0.139 Solder Lug 8 S.P.S.T. 0.187 Q.C. Terminals 4 S.P.D.T. 0.110 Q.C. Terminals 9 S.P.D.T. 0.187 Q.C. Terminals (Gold Contacts) A 6 S.P.S.T., 0.093 Round 5 S.P.S.T., 0.093 Q.C. Terminals QC Terminals (Gold Contacts) B 6 S.P.D.T., 0.093 Round 6 S.P.S.T. 0.110 Q.C. Terminals QC Terminals 14 16 22 24 26 9 Actuator Color 10 MOUNTING Front Mounting Inserts A 10-32 B ISO M5 Parallel Pole Construction: M 3,4 Series Trip (Current) with Metering Shunt N 3,4 Switch Only with Metering Shunt P 3 Series Trip (Current) Q 3 Switch Only 6 FREQUENCY & DELAY 03 DC 50/60Hz, Switch Only 10 7 DC Instantaneous 11 DC Ultra Short 12 DC Short 7 Current Rating 1 2 A 8 Terminal 9 ACTUATOR COLOR & LEGEND 12,13 Actuator Color I-O ON-OFF White AB Black CD 1 SERIES F 3 POLES 1 One 820 A65 65 DC, 55 DC B25 125 DC, 100 DC J06 6 AC, 5 AC 11 MAXIMUM APPLICATION RATING VOLTAGECURRENT B 125 VDC 700A C 15 120/240250A F 277 VAC 250A 7 16 120/208 VAC 250A 12 AGENCY APPROVAL A No approvals G UL489 Listed & CUL Certified J UL489 Listed, CUL Certified & TUV Certified T UL489A (Telecom) Listed Notes: 1 For 100 to 250 amps, select Current Code 825. For 300-400 amps, select Current Code 840. For 450-700 amps, select Current Code 870. 2 Available with Frequency and Delay code 10 or 20 only, and are not rated for continuous duty. Delay 10 and 20 are only available with voltage coils. 3 3 Codes M, N, P & Q (Parallel Poles) are supplied with factory installed Bus Bar on Line and Load. 4 4 Metering terminals are female pin type, ref. Molex part number 02-09-1101, model 1189-T. 5 Auxiliary Switch breakers are only available with Series Trip and Switch Only circuits. On multi-pole breakers, one Auxiliary Switch is supplied, mounted in the extreme right pole per figure A. Back-Mounted breakers require special mounting provisions when an Auxiliary Switch is specified. 6 Available with parallel pole construction (circuit codes P and Q, and breakers with circuit codes M and N). 7 Frequency and delay code 10 is only available with Voltage Coils. Voltage Coils are not rated for continuous duty. 8 Ratings over 250 amps are only available with Agency Approval code T (UL489A) and are Parallel Pole configuration (circuit codes M, N, P and Q.) 300-450 amp ratings are available on two pole breakers. 500-700 amp ratings are available on three pole breakers. 9 Per UL requirement, an “Anti-Flash Over Barrier” is supplied between poles on multipole breakers with 3/8 - 16 stud terminals (Terminal Code 1) on AC rated breakers only. 10 Front connected breakers can also be front mounted by utilizing the supplied front panel mounting inserts. Terminal connections must be made before mounting. 11 Box Wire connector will accept #6 through 250 MCM copper wire. 12 Agency codes G & T must have ON-OFF or dual legends. Agency code J must have dual legend. 13 Other colors available. Consult factory. 14 Terminals 2,4 & 5 are shipped without terminal hardware. 15 2 or 3 Pole Circuit Breaker Required for 120/240 VAC Rating. 16 3 Pole Circuit Breaker Required for 120/208 VAC Rating. Max Rating 250A 700A 250A Max Rating 700A 700A 85 F-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Circuit & Terminal Diagrams Circuit & Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 86 www.carlingtech.com F-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Circuit & Terminal Diagrams Circuit & Terminal Diagrams: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 87 F-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 88 www.carlingtech.com F-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 89 F-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] F-Series breakers are available up to 700A, and are also available with a 25 millivolt metering shunt construction. This optional construction provides a safe method for monitoring current flowing through the breaker by simply connecting a meter with light gauge wire to the appropriate terminals located on the shunt housing at the rear of the breaker. You can customize the application by measuring and displaying percentage of current, watts or safe/ danger zones. Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. 90 www.carlingtech.com F-Series Circuit Breaker - Handle – Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Notes: 1 All dimensions are in inches [millimeters]. 2 Tolerance ±.020 [.51] unless otherwise specified. www.carlingtech.com 91 Time Delay Values - MS-Series Circuit Breakers , Notes: 1 2 3 4 Delay Curves 12,14, 22, 24, 32, 34, 62, 64, 72, 74, 92, 94: Breakers to hold 100% and must trip at 135% of rated current and greater within the time limit shown in this curve. Delay Curves 10, 20, 30: Breakers to hold 100% and must trip at 150% of rated current and greater within the time limit shown in this curve. All Curves: Curve data shown represents breaker response at ambient temperature of 77°F (25°C) with no preloading. Breakers are mounted in standard wall-mount position. The minimum inrush pulse tolerance handling capability is 12 times the rated current on standard delays and 18 times the rated current on high inrush delays. These values are based on a 60 Hz 1/2 cycle, 8.33 ms pulse. High inrush delays should be specified for applications with high initial surge currents of short duration, such as switching power supplies, highly capacitive loads and transformer loads. Instantaneous 92 Dual Rated AC/DC Short Short D2 Medium Medium D4 www.carlingtech.com Time Delay Values - A, B, C-Series Circuit Breakers A, B, C, CX, D, G, H, L, N-SERIES TIME VALUES PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT Notes: UL489 C-Series Breakers available with Delay Curves 11, 12, 14, 16, 21, 22, 24, 26, 42, 44, 46. Delay Curves 11,12,14,16,21,22,24,26,42,44,46,52,54,56: Breakers to hold 100% and must trip at 125% of rated current and greater within the time limit shown in this curve. Delay Curves 32,34,36: Breakers to hold 100% and must trip at 135% of rated current and greater within the time limit shown in this curve. Delay Curves 10,20: Breakers to hold 100% and must trip at 150% of rated current and greater within the time limit shown in this curve. All Curves: Curve data shown represents breaker response at ambient temperature of 77°F (25°C) with no preloading. Breakers are mounted in standard wall-mount position. On 50 amp and less current ratings, the minimum inrush pulse tolerance handling capability is 12 times the rated current on standard delays and 25 times the rated current on high inrush delays. These values are based on a 60 Hz 1/2 cycle, 8.33 ms pulse. High inrush delays should be specified for applications with high initial surge currents of short duration such as switching power supplies, highly capacitive loads and transformer loads. DC TRIP TIME IN SECONDS AC TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Instantaneous PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Ultrashort PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Short PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT www.carlingtech.com PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT 93 Time Delay Values - A, B, C-Series Circuit Breakers TRIP TIME IN SECONDS DC TRIP TIME IN SECONDS AC Medium TRIP TIME IN SECONDS PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT Long PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS High Inrush DC TRIP TIME IN SECONDS High Inrush AC Short TRIP TIME IN SECONDS PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT Medium TRIP TIME IN SECONDS PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT Long PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT 94 PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT www.carlingtech.com Time Delay Values - A, B, C-Series Circuit Breakers AC/DC TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Short PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Medium PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Long PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT www.carlingtech.com 95 Time Delay Values - E-Series Circuit Breaker NOTES Delay Curves 10,20,30: Breakers to hold 100% and must trip at 150% of rated current and greater wthin the time limit shown in these curves. Delay Curves 12,14,16,22,24,26,62,64,66,72,74,76: Breakers to hold 100% and must trip at 125% of rated current and greater wthin the time limit shown in these curves. Delay Curves 32,34,36,92,94,96: Breakers to hold 100% and must trip at 135% of rated current and greater wthin the time limit shown in these curves. All curves: Data shown represents breaker response at ambient temperature of 77°F (25°C) with no preloading: Breakers are mounted in standard wall-mount position. The minimum inrush pulse tolerance handling capacity on the above standard delays is 16 times rated current &20 times rated current for high inrush delays based on a 60Hz 1/2 cycle, 8.33 ms pulse. DC TRIP TIME IN SECONDS AC TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Instantaneous PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Short PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Medium PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Long PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT 96 PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT www.carlingtech.com Time Delay Values - E-Series Circuit Breaker TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Instantaneous AC/DC PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Short PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Medium PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Long PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT www.carlingtech.com 97 Time Delay Values - F-Series Circuit Breaker Short - AC 22 11 No Trip .013 - .125 .010 - .070 .008 - .032 .006 - .020 .005 - .020 .004 - .020 .004 - .020 12 No Trip .475 - 10.0 .275 - 2.80 .140 - .850 .030 - .190 .015 - .125 .010 - .050 .008 - .038 14 16 22 24 26 No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip No Trip 10.0 - 110 110 - 1000 .700 - 12.0 10.0 - 160 50.0 - 700 6.00 - 40.0 60.0 - 400 .350 - 4.00 6.00 - 60.0 32.0 - 350 2.50 - 15.0 22.0 - 150 .130 - 1.30 .220 - 20.0 10.0 - 90.0 .500 - 3.00 4.00 - 25.0 .027 - .220 .300 - 3.00 1.50 - 15.0 .180 - 1.00 1.00 - 5.50 .008 - .130 .050 - 1.30 .500 - 7.00 .010 - .280 .008 - .080 .008 - .390 .004 - .045 .005 - .060 .006 - 2.00 AC Ultrashort - DC .010 - 1.80 .004 - .090 .007 - .500 .020 - 3.00 DC TRIP TIME IN SECONDS TRIP TIME IN SECONDS F SERIES 50/60 HZ SHORT CURVE NO. 22 PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT Short - DC PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS F SERIES 50/60 HZ MEDIUM CURVE NO. 24 TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Medium - AC 24 Medium - DC PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT Long - AC 26 TRIP TIME IN SECONDS F SERIES 50/60 HZ LONG CURVE NO. 26 PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT TRIP TIME IN SECONDS Long - DC PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT 98 TRIP TIME IN SECONDS PERCENT OF RATED CURRENT www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Introduction V-Series V-Series CONTURA SWITCHES Carling Technologies’ sealed V-Series Contura switches are well known for their cutting edge design, high quality, maximum performance and unmatched reliability. These switches are a staple in the marine and transportation industries and have passed a range of environmental, corrosion, temperature, vibration, shock and sealing tests including MIL Std 202F, MIL Std 810C, UL 1500, ISO 8846, IEC 60529 and BS 5490 among others, making them one of the most rugged and reliable switches ever manufactured. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Watch Product Video Product Highlights: Certified to IP66 with dual seals around lamps and rocker stem. Silver plated butt contact mechanism provides reliability up to and beyond 100K electrical cycles Greaseless construction withstands temperature extremes down to -40˚C The switch accommodates up to 10 terminals and endless illumination and circuit options. The switch connector allows the user to preload FQC terminals for ease of assembly. Numerous choices of removable rockers allow for style change without having to retest or re-qualify the switch base. www.carlingtech.com 99 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Design Features V-Series Switch DESIGN FEATURES INTERCHANGEABLE ACTUATORS Panel redesign is a snap with our wide range of rocker styles. Achieve maximum design variety with minimum inventory. Simply swap rockers to create an entirely new look for your panel. OPTIONAL PANEL SEAL Prevents water/dust ingress behind panel. 100 DUAL SEAL PROTECTION Seals out water, dust, debris, and enables switch certification to IP66 for front panel components. MULTIPLE LIGHTING OPTIONS In addition to Incandescent lamps, our LED illumination is offered in a wide array of light intensities, colors, as well as dual level, tri-color, and flashing options. CLEAN CONNECTIONS Options for both eight and ten terminal base styles with AMP & Packard compatible connectors affords myriad circuit options while providing ease of assembly. BRASS ROLLER PIN Robust mechanism eliminates the need for lubricants. Enables switch to withstand -40°C to +85°C temperatures. SILVER PLATED BUTT CONTACT MECHANISM Providing 50k to 100k electrical cycles and a variety of different electrical ratings. www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Actuator Options & Accessories Contura II & III Contura X Contura IV Contura XI Contura V Contura XII Contura VI (WAVE) Contura XIV Contura VII Illuminated Indicators & Accessories The Contura II & III actuators are constructed of thermoplastic polycarbonate and are offered with a hard nylon overlay or a “soft-touch” elastomer overlay. These models incorporate aesthetic designs on the top and bottom of the rocker featuring two rows of raised “bumps” on the Contura II and three “indented” lines on the Contura III. The Contura IV’s “Shape to create a Shape” actuator works with the curves, contours & advanced styling of the latest panel designs, flowing with these advanced curves & radii. This actuator style fits on the Contura flush bracket/bezel. The symmetrically curved Contura V actuator provides the perfect complement to the Contura IV’s “Shape to create a Shape” design concept. With its flush style mounting bracket, Contura V can be mounted in between two Contura IV’s, by itself, or in groups. The Contura VI WAVE sealed rocker switches, when used in a row, create an uniquely appealing “wave” design on your panel. A variety of colors and finishes are available for both rocker and wave insert. Contura VI features bar and oval lenses. Contura VII featuring gently curved corners and edges assuring compatibility with most any panel design. Intuitive feel is maximized by the use of 2 embossed circular pads located at opposite ends of the rocker. Any combination of Bar or Oval style lenses can be located in the pads providing a truly unique look, exclusive to Contura VII. www.carlingtech.com The raised bracket/bezel on the Contura X helps prevent inadvertent actuation of the rocker, as well as preventing debris from being trapped under the actuator. This curved rocker style is available with a variety of lenses and legends. The raised bracket/bezel on the Contura XI helps prevent inadvertent actuation of the rocker, as well as preventing debris from being trapped under the actuator. This convex style rocker is available with a wide variety of lenses and legends. The Contura XII version features a paddle style actuator with the raised bracket/bezel of Contura X and XI. The contoured handle design provides intuitive recognition and ease of operation and is available with all Contura X and XI lens and legend offerings. The Contura XIV represents a sleek new crossover rocker design which should appeal to Trucks, Buses and Heavy Vehicles as well as the Marine Industry. Intuitive feel is provided by recessed ridges along with a Center Groove which effectively defines the boundary between top and bottom switch functions. Alert operator of systems functions or malfunctions, are offered with removable/replaceable lamps in Contura II, II, V or X styles. Accessories include connectors, mounting panels, hole plugs, panel seals, and actuator removal tools. Refer to accessories page for full details 101 V–Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - General Specifications Electrical Contact Rating .4VA @ 24VDC (MAX) resistive 15 amps, 125VAC 10 amps, 250VAC 1/2 HP 125-250VAC 20 amps, 4-14VDC 15 amps, 15-28VDC 10A, 14VT 6A, 125VAC L Dielectric Strength 1500 Volts RMS Insulation Resistance 50 Megohms Initial Contact Resistance 10 milliohms max. @ 4VDC Life 50,000 - 100,000 cycles circuit dependent Contacts Silver alloy, silver tin-oxide, fine silver Terminals Brass or copper/silver plate 1/4” (6.3mm) Quick Connect terminations standard. Solder lug, Wire Lead Mechanical Endurance 150,000 cycles minimum circuit dependent Physical Lighted Incandescent - rated 10,000 hours Neon - rated 25,000 hours LED - rated 100,000 hours 1/2 life (LED is internally ballasted for voltages to 24VDC) Seals Internal Optional external gasket panel seal Base Polyester blend rated to 125°C with a UL flammability rating of 94V0. Contura II,III,IV,V, Hard Surface: Basic actuator VI, VII Actuator structure molded of thermoplastic polycarbonate with a hard Nylon 66 thermoplastic surface overlay. Soft Surface: Basic actuator structure molded of thermoplastic polycarbonate with an elastomer overlay. Contura X,XI,XII Actuator,VP Nylon 66 Reinforced rated to 105°C Lens Polycarbonate rated at 100°C Contura XIV Polycarbonate lens/sub-rocker with ABS shell Actuator Travel (Angular Displacement) 2 position 3 positions 18° 9° from center Mounting Specifications Agency Certifications Environmental Sealing Sealed version: IP66, this rating applies to front panel components of the actual switch only, and signifies complete protection against dust as well as powerful jets of water. Corrosion Mixed Flowing Gas (MFG) Class III 3 year accelerated exposure per ASTM B-827, B-845 Silver and gold contacts Operating Temp. -40°C to +85°C Vibration 1 Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 204D Test Condition A 0.06 DA or 10G’s 10-500 Hz. Tested with VCH connector. Test criteria - No loss of circuit during test, pre and post test contact resistance. Vibration 2 Resonance search 24-50 Hz 0.40 DA 50-2000 Hz ±10 G’s peak Horizontal Axis 3-5 G’s max. Random 24 Hz 0.06 PSD-Gsq/Hz 60 Hz 0.50 100 Hz 0.50 200 Hz 0.025 2000 Hz 0.025 No loss of circuit during test; <10μ seconds chatter. Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 213B, Test Condition K @ 30G’s. Tested with VCH connector. Test criteria - No loss of circuit during test, pre and post test contact resistance. Salt Spray Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 101D, Test Condition A, 96 Hrs. Sealed version only. Dust Per Mil-Std 810C, Method 510.2 Air Velocity 300 ±200 Feet/Min, Test Duration 16 Hrs. Thermal Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 107F, Test Cond. A, -55°C to +85°C. Test criteria pre and post test contact resistance Moisture Resistance Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 106F, Test Criteria - pre and post test contact resistance Ignition Protection All Contura switches with sealed construction meet the requirements of UL1500/ISO8846 for ignition protection, in addition to conformance with EC directive 94/25/EC for marine products. .830[21.08] Panel Thickness Range Gaskets Acceptable Panel Thickness 0 .030 to .250 (.76 to 6.35mm) TEST CUT 1.450[36.83] HOLE IN 1 .030 to .109 & .147 to .157 ACTUAL MATERIAL (.76 to 2.77mm & 3.73 to 3.98mm) Recommended: No gasket with panel SWITCH thickness of .032, .062, .093, .125,.187 or .250 MOUNTING HOLE 102 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura II & III - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A B T 0 B 1 Series 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 8 Bracket 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ONNONE OFF 2B (ON)NONE OFF 3C ONNONE (OFF) 4D ONNONE ON 5F ONNONE (ON) 6J ONOFF ON 7K ONOFF (ON) 8L (ON)OFF (ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 3 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. 9 Actuator 10 Lens 11 Color 12 Legend 0 00 13 14 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 6,7 LAMP (SAME CODING FOR BOTH SELECTIONS) Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbrightsuperbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No SealB W G One SealC Y H 9 ACTUATOR 0 No Actuator A, B Contura II C, D Contura III Actuator orientation above terminals: 10 LENS 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens ClearWhite Amber Green Red 1 6 8 G M 2 7 C H N 3 8 D J P 4 9 E K R 5 A F L S 3,6 1,4 Blue T U V W Y Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 5 ILLUMINATION Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY J8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) KW 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) MR 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) NT 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) PV 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) www.carlingtech.com A R B 00 11 ACTUATOR COLOR 1 AND TEXTURE 0 - No Actuator BlackGray Red White Soft Surface BGRW Hard Surface CHSY 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGENDS 2 11ON 12OFF 13 I 14O OFF ONO I 15 O O 16O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 Body legends not available on Soft surface actuators; White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 4 Contura II available with two square lenses. Consult factory for details. 103 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura II & III Locking - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A S W 0 B 1 Series 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lock 7 Lamp 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ON NONEOFF 4D ON NONEON 6J ON OFFON 7K ON OFF(ON) 8L (ON) OFF(ON) 9N OFF NONEON SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 4 1 B C D E F M N .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive 15A 24V 20A 18V 20A 12V 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) .4VA/20A 12V .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. A Z E 00 8 Bracket 9 Actuator 10 Lens 11 Function 0 12 Legend 13 Legend Orientation 7 LAMP Lamp above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbrightsuperbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No SealB W G One SealC Y H 9 HARD SURFACE ACTUATOR 1 BlackGray Red White Contura II A BGH Contura III C DEF 3,6 Actuator orientation above terminals: 1,4 10 LENS Z - No Lens ClearWhite Amber Green Red Blue 3 8 D J P V Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY MR 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 11 ACTUATOR LOCK FUNCTION AND COLOR 1 Lock Color Up Down Up & Down Center 3 Match Actuator A HR 1 Black BJ S 2 White CK T 3 Red DL V 4 Safety Orange EM W 5 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend 21 22 23 24 OFF ON O I 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I F N F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 21-28 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 ORIENTATION 1 ORIENTATION 4 ORIENTATION 2 AZC45-1 AZC45-2 6 LOCK Lock above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch Wlock 45 45 ORIENTATION 3 Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Only available with 3 position circuits. Center OFF and special circuits only available with center position lock function. 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 104 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura IV - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A B T 0 B 1 Series 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 8 Bracket 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 123 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ON NONEOFF 2B (ON)NONEOFF 3C ON NONE(OFF) 4D ONNONEON 5F ON NONE(ON) 6J ONOFFON 7K ON OFF(ON) 8L (ON)OFF(ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 4 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. 10 Lens 11 Color 12 Legend 0 00 13 14 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 6,7 LAMP (SAME CODING FOR BOTH SELECTIONS) Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbrightsuperbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D P JV * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No SealB W G One SealC Y H 9 ACTUATOR 0 No Actuator E Contura IV, left orientation T Contura IV, left orientation, laser etched F Contura IV, right orientation R Contura IV, right orientation, laser etched Actuator orientation above terminals: 10 LENS 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens ClearWhite Amber Green Red 1 6 8 G M 2 7 C H N 3 8 D J P 4 9 E K R 5 A F L S 1,4 3,6 Blue T U V W Y EF Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. 11 ACTUATOR COLOR 1,5,6 No Actuator 0 Black C White Y Nickel D Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY J8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) KW 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) MR 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) NT 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) PV 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) www.carlingtech.com E P C 00 9 Actuator Gray H Pewter E Red S 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGENDS 2 11ON 12OFF 13 I 14O OFF ONO I 15 O O 16O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 ORIENTATION 1 ORIENTATION 4 E8C45-100 E3C70-200 F8C45-100 F3C70-200 ORIENTATION 2 E8C45-300 F8C45-300 ORIENTATION 3 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Gloss brow is on left side of E actuator and right side of F actuator. 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 5 Laser etched rocker only available with lens code Z & actuator colors black, nickel or pewter. 6 Pewter and nickel colors only available with laser etched actuator. 105 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura V - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A B T 0 B 1 Series 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1 A ONNONE OFF 2 B (ON)NONE OFF 3 C ON NONE(OFF) 4 D ONNONE ON 5 F ONNONE(ON) 6 J ONOFF ON 7 K ONOFF(ON) 8 L (ON)OFF (ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 4 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. 9 Actuator 10 Lens 11 Color Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 12 Legend 0 00 13 14 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 6,7 LAMP (SAME CODING FOR BOTH SELECTIONS) Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbrightsuperbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No SealB W G One SealC Y H 9 ACTUATOR 0 No Actuator G Contura V P Contura V, laser etched 10 Lens 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens style & location: #1 / #2 ClearWhite Amber Green Red Blue 1 6 8 G M T bar 2 7 C H N U bar/bar 3 8 D J P V oval 4 9 E K R W oval/bar 5 A F L S Y oval/oval Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. 11 ACTUATOR COLOR 1,3,5 No Actuator 0 Black C White Y Nickel D 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY J8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) KW 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) MR1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) NT 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) PV 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 106 G P C 00 8 Bracket Gray H Pewter E Red S 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGENDS 2,6 11ON 12OFF 13 I 14O OFF ONO I 15 O O 16O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL ORIENTATION 1 4G13L ORIENTATION 4 4G MC MA 4G MA MC 3L ORIENTATION 2 4G200 MA3MC MA1MC ORIENTATION 3 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Laser Etched rocker only available with lens code Z & actuator colors black, nickel or pewter. 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 5 Nickel and Pewter colors only available with laser etched actuator. 6 Consult factory for laser etched lens callout. www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura IV & V Locking - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A S W 0 B 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lock 7 Lamp 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT 3 Terminal Connections as viewed ( ) - momentary from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ON NONEOFF 4D ONNONE ON 6J ONOFF ON 7K ON OFF(ON) 8L (ON)OFF (ON) 9N OFFNONE ON 10 Lens 11 Function 12 Legend 13 Legend Orientation 7 LAMP Lamp above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbrightsuperbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No SealB W G One SealC Y H Actuator orientation above terminals: CONTURA V: Orientation BlackGray Red White UV WY Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY MR 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 6 LOCK Lock above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch. W low profile lock Y 6 9 Actuator 9 HARD SURFACE ACTUATOR CONTURA IV: Orientation BlackGray Red White Left J KL M Right NPR S 3 RATING 4 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. 8 Bracket high profile lock Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Only available with 3 position circuits. Center OFF and special circuits only available with center position lock function. 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 5 Located at T3-6 end of switch. 6 Contura V style only. 3,6 1,4 Actuator orientation above terminals: 3,6 1,4 10 LENS 5 Z - No Lens ClearWhiteAmberGreenRed Blue A B C D E F bar lens G H J K L M oval lens Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. 11 ACTUATOR LOCK FUNCTION AND COLOR 1 Lock Color Up Down Up & DownCenter 3 Match Actuator A HR1 Black BJ S2 White CKT 3 Red DL V4 Safety Orange E M W5 Gray F GN6 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend 21 22 23 24 OFF ON O I 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I F N F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 JHAY3-100 ORIENTATION 1 JHAY3-200 JHAY3-300 ORIENTATION 2 2 Circuit 0 ORIENTATION 4 1 Series J Z E 00 P P P P P P NHAY3-100 www.carlingtech.com NHAY3-200 NHAY3-300 ORIENTATION 3 107 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura VI WAVE - Ordering Scheme V 1 D B G N T B 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 8 Bracket 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ONNONE OFF 2B (ON)NONE OFF 3C ON NONE(OFF) 4D ONNONE ON 5F ONNONE(ON) 6J ONOFF ON 7K ONOFF(ON) 8L (ON)OFF (ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 3 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. 10 Lens 11 Lens 12 Color 13 Insert Color 14 Actuator Lens 1 00 15 16 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 7 LAMP Lamp above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbrightsuperbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No SealB W G One SealC Y H 9 ACTUATOR 0 No Actuator H High Insert 10,11 LENS 4 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens Clear White AmberGreen Red – 7 C H N 3 – D J P 4 – E K R – A F L S L Low Insert Blue U Bar Lens Translucent V Bar Lens Transparent W Oval Lens Transparent Y Oval Lens Translucent Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. 12 ACTUATOR COLOR C Black H Gray Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 13 INSERT COLOR B Black C Bright Chrome Plated D Satin Chrome Painted S Red Y White N Bright Nickel Plated S Satin Chrome Plated T Satin Nickel Plated W White 14 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGENDS 2 00 - No Legend this location/No actuator 11ON 12OFF 13 I 14O OFF ONO I 15 O O 16O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. 15 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 Orientation 1 VTHAACN-MC1MC VTHA7CN-3M100 VTHWZCB-45146 VTLSZSC-70100 Orientation 2 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY J8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) KW 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) MR1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) NT 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) PV 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 108 H A 7 C B AC 9 Actuator Orientation 4 1 Series VTLLFHC-A813H VTLDECC-001MG Orientation 3 16 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators. Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura VII - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A B T 0 B 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1 A ON NONEOFF 2 B (ON)NONE OFF 3 C ON NONE(OFF) 4 D ONNONE ON 5 F ON NONE(ON) 6 J ONOFF ON 7 K ON OFF(ON) 8 L (ON)OFF (ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 4 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 13 14 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 6,7 LAMP (same coding for both selections) Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbrightsuperbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No SealB W G One SealC Y H ACTUATOR ORENTATION ABOVE TERMINALS 9 ACTUATOR 0 No Actuator Z Contura VII 3,6 1,4 STANDARD 10 LENS Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens White Amber Green Red Blue Lens style & location 6 B G MT 7 C H NU 8 D J PV 9 E K RW A F L SY 1 2 3 45 ORIENTATION 3 11 ACTUATOR COLOR/THUMB PRINT COLOR 1 O N/A - No Actuator CBlack/Black HGrey/Black SRed/Black YWhite/Black ORIENTATION 4 ORIENTATION 3 ORIENTATION 1 14 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGENDS 2 11ON 12OFF 13 I 14O OFF ONO I 15 O O 16O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. ORIENTATION 1 AA AA 46 46 3AA-146 ORIENTATION 2 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 ORIENTATION 4 Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY J8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) KW 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) MR 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) NT 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) PV 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) www.carlingtech.com 0 00 12 Legend ORIENTATION 2 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. 11 Color ORIENTATION 4 3 Rating 10 Lens ORIENTATION 1 2 Circuit Z R C 00 9 Actuator ORIENTATION 2 1 Series 8 Bracket 3AA-246 ORIENTATION 3 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators. Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 4 Legends available for lighted oval lens version only 109 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura X, XI & XII - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A B 6 0 1 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT Terminal Connections as viewed ( ) - momentary from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 123 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ON NONEOFF 2B (ON)NONEOFF 3C ON NONE(OFF) 4D ONNONEON 5F ON NONE(ON) 6J ONOFFON 7K ON OFF(ON) 8L (ON)OFF(ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 4 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. 6 P Z 00 8 Bracket Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 10 Lens 11 Lens 12 Legend 0 00 13 14 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 6,7 LAMP (same coding for both selections) Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbrightsuperbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL (EXTERNAL FOAM GASKET) X & XI with Flush Bracket X, XI, XII with Raised Bracket # of gaskets0 1 2 0 1 Black B C D 1 4 White WY Z 2 5 Gray GH J 3 6 9 ACTUATOR No Actuator 0 Black Gray WhiteRed Contura X 1 23 4 Contura XI 6 78 9 Contura XII J K N M Actuator orientation above terminals: 3,6 1,4 10 LENS - ABOVE LAMP #1 TERMINALS 1,4 11 LENS - ABOVE LAMP #2 TERMINALS 3,6 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens Clear White Amber Green Red Blue Lens Style 3 8 D J PVBar 4 9 E K RW One piece Square 5 A F L SYTwo piece Square* (With clear top protective lens) 2 7 C H NUTwo piece Square* (With smoke top protective lens) 1 6 B G MTTwo piece Square* (With white top protective lens) * All bottom lenses are molded of opaque material. Consult factory for other lens colors. Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend this location/No actuator 11 ON 12 OFF 13 I 14 O OFF ON O I 15 O O 16 O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F 21 22 23 24 OFF ON O I 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I F N F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 3 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 6ZZ3G-100 6FFMA-4MC MA 3G ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL ORIENTATION 1 ORIENTATION 2 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – A 1 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 2 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) D 4 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 5 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) F 6 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) G 7 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) U Y 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY J8 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) KW 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L9 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) MR1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) NT 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) PV 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 9 Actuator ORIENTATION 4 1 Series 70 G3 A7 MC MA 6ZZ3G-1A7 6FFMA-3MC MC 6FZ70-100 ORIENTATION 3 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red & gray actuators. Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 With 2 square lenses, use selection 12 for lens above lamp 1, & selection 14 for lens above lamp 2. 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 5 Not available with Contura XI rockers. 110 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura X Locking - Ordering Scheme V 1 D A S W 0 1 1 Series 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lock 7 Lamp 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ON NONEOFF 4D ON NONEON 6J ON OFFON 9N OFFNONEON SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 4 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) M .4VA/20A 12V N .4VA/15A 24V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 35 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 5 ILLUMINATION & SWITCH SEALING Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Sealed Unsealed Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S 0 NONE – – C 3 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H Z 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY MR1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) 6 LOCK Lock above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch. WLock Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators; Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Located over T1-4 end of switch. 4 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. 5 Located over T3-6 end of switch. 1 P B 00 8 Bracket 9 Actuator 10 Lens 11 Function 12 Legend 0 13 Legend Orientation 6,7 LAMP (same coding for both selections) Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbrightsuperbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 FLUSH BRACKET COLOR 1, PANEL SEAL Black White Gray No Gasket1 2 3 One Gasket4 5 6 9 HARD SURFACE ACTUATOR Contura X Black 1 Grey 2 Red 3 White 4 Actuator orientation above terminals: 3,6 1,4 10 LENS - ABOVE LAMP #2 TERMINALS 5 Z - No Lens Clear White Amber Green Red Blue Lens Style 3 8 D J PV Bar 4 9 E K RWOne piece Square 5 A F L SY Two piece Square* (with clear top protective lens) 27CHN U Two piece Square* (with smoke top protective lens) 1 6 B G MT Two piece Square* (with white top protective lens) * All bottom lenses are molded of opaque material. Consult factory for other lens colors. Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. 11 ACTUATOR LOCK FUNCTION AND COLOR 3 Lock Color Up Down Up & Down Match Actuator A HR Black BJ S White CKT Red DL V Gray E MW Safety Orange F NY 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend 21 22 23 24 OFF ON O I 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I F N F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Orientation 1 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 3 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 Orientation 4 Orientation 4 4 Orientation 2 1PM4F-1 45 4F MC Orientation 3 18K45-2 13DMC-1 www.carlingtech.com 111 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura XIV - Ordering Scheme V 1 D B B C 0 B 1 Series 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 8 Bracket 1 SERIES V 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1A ON NONEOFF 2B (ON)NONEOFF 3C ON NONE(OFF) 4D ON NONEON 5F ON NONE(ON) 6J ON OFFON 7K ON OFF(ON) 8L (ON) OFF(ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS H* 2 & 3 2 & 3, 5 & 4 5&4 G* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF M* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF R* (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 2&1 E* 5 & 6 5 & 3 5&1 S* 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 1&2 *Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for circuits H,G,M,R & S are specified in selection 4. External jumper between terminals 2 & 4 for circuit E are provided by customer. Circuit E may be used for SP OFF-ON-ON circuit. 3 RATING 3 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuit 1, 4 , A & D only) F 10A 14V, 6A 14VT (circuit G only) 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 term 10 Term Termination 12 .250 TAB (QC) no barriers AB .250 TAB (QC) with barriers JK .250 TAB (QC) no barriers 34 Solder Lug no barriers CD Solder Lug 56 Wire Leads no barriers EF Wire Leads Note: Codes J & K for circuits H, G & M. 10 Lens 11 Actuator Color 1 00 12 Legend 13 14 Legend Actuator, Orientation Lens Legends 6 & 7 LAMP No lamp 0 Neon 1 125VAC 2 250VAC Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* superbrightsuperbright Red AmberGreen Red 2VDC A LF R 6VDC B MG S 12VDC C NH T 24VDC D PJ V * Consult factory for “daylight bright” LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 BRACKET COLOR & PANEL SEAL Color No Gasket 1 Gasket 2 Gasket BlackB C D GrayG H J White W YZ 9 ACTUATOR STYLE 0 No Actuator - Furnished separately FA Contura XIV FB Contura XIV - Laser Etched 10 LENS COLOR / STYLE 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens ClearWhite Amber Green Red 1 6 B G M 2 7 C H N 3 8 D J P 4 9 E K R 5 A F L S 5 A N/A N/A N/A Blue T U V W Y N/A PAD Printed Laser-Etched Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. Green or blue lenses are not recommended with Neon lamps. Jumper No No Yes T2 to 5 No No No No 5 ILLUMINATION Lamp #1:above terminals 1 & 4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3 & 6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Lamps Illumination Type Lamp wired to Terminals S NONE – – A 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) B 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) C 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) D 1 DOWN 3 (+) 7 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 7 (–) E 1 UP 1 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) F 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) G 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 7 (–) H 2 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) SINGLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY J 1 DOWN 3 (+) 8 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) K 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 6 (+) 7 (–) DOUBLE POLE SWITCHES ONLY L 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) M 1 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) N 1 DOWN 3 (+) 6 (–) 2 DOWN 1 (+) 4 (–) P 1 UP 1 (+) 4 (–) 2 UP 3 (+) 6 (–) U 1 INDEPENDENT 8 (+) 7 (–) 2 INDEPENDENT 10 (+) 9 (–) 112 FA P C AB 9 Actuator 11 ACTUATOR COLOR 1 O N/A - No Actuator CBlack SRed YWhite 12 ACTUATOR LENS or BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend this location/No actuator 11ON 12OFF 13 I 14O OFF ONO I 15 O O 16O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 1 2 3 4 14 ACTUATOR / LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens and one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red and gray actuators. 3 Additional ratings available. See V-Series Switch Accessories page. www.carlingtech.com V–Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura II, III, & IV - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] www.carlingtech.com 113 V–Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura V, VI & VII - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] CONTURA V CONTURA V SHOWN WITH BAR LENS SHOWN WITH LOW PROFILE LOCK 1.922 [48.56] 1.922 [48.56] 1.079 [27.40] 8 TERMINAL BASE W/BARRIERS .505 [12.83] .250 [6.35] X .031 [.78] .250 [6.35] X .031 [.78] SWITCH SHOWN WITH VCH CONNECTOR 8 TERMINAL 114 .960 [24.38] .960 [24.38] 8 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 10 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 8 7 8 7 1 4 1 4 2 5 2 5 3 6 3 6 10 9 BOTTOM VIEW TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT 8 TERMINAL BASE BOTTOM VIEW TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT 10 TERMINAL BASE 10 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 0.985 [25.02] .250 [6.35] .031 [.78] .820 [20.83] .820 [20.83] .960 [24.38] 2.029 [51.53] 1.000 [25.40] .250 [6.35] X .031 [.78] .390 [9.90] 8 TERMINAL BASE W/BARRIERS 1.922 [48.82] 10 TERMINAL BASE W/BARRIER AND LAMP TERMINAL 1.020 [25.91] .505 [12.83] SHOWN WITH LARGE LENS AND BAR LENS 1.126 [28.60] 8 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 1.020 [25.91] CONTURA VII SHOWN WITH OVAL LENS 1.950 [49.53] .080[2.03] 1.479 [37.57] 1.550 [39.37] CONTURA VI SWITCH SHOWN WITH VC1 CONNECTOR 10 TERMINAL .820 [20.83] .960 [24.38] 10 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS SWITCH SHOWN WITH VC1 CONNECTOR 10 TERMINAL www.carlingtech.com V–Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Contura X, XI, XII & XIV - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] CONTURA X SHOWN WITH RAISED BRACKET CONTURA XI CONTURA XII CONTURA XIV SHOWN WITH RAISED BRACKET AND TWO SQUARE LENSES SHOWN WITH PADDLE ACTUATOR SHOWN WITH LARGE LENS 1.928 [48.97] .350 [8.89] .667 [16.94] 1.910 [48.51] 1.910 [48.51] .426 [10.82] .350 [8.89] 1.586 [40.28] .573 [14.56] 1.305 [33.15] 1.506 [38.25] 1.370 [34.79] 1.370 [34.79] 1.370 [34.79] 8 TERMINAL BASE W/BARRIERS 10 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 8 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 10 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS .960 [24.38] .960 [24.38] .970 [24.64] .960 [24.38] .780 [19.81] .780 [19.81] .780 [19.81] .250 [6.35] X .031[.78] .390 [9.90] .390 [9.90] .820 [20.82] 8 TERMINAL BASE W/BARRIERS SWITCH SHOWN WITH VCH CONNECTOR 8 TERMINAL www.carlingtech.com .390 [9.90] .820 [20.82] .820 [20.82] 10 TERMINAL BASE W/BARRIERS .960 [24.38] 10 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 8 1 7 4 8 7 1 4 2 5 2 5 3 6 3 6 10 9 BOTTOM VIEW TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT 8 TERMINAL BASE .820 [20.83] BOTTOM VIEW TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT 10 TERMINAL BASE SWITCHES SHOWN WITH VC1 CONNECTOR 10 TERMINAL 115 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - II to XIV - Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagrams: CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 3 1 3 2 3 5 3 3 5 3 6 2 1 3 4 2 1 2 6 3 4 2 6 4 1 1 6 5 3 3 6 5 3 2 6 5 6 G SYMBOL LEGEND SYM. 2 3 S 2 7 6 5 2 F 1 5 2 5 3 1 2 6 R 2 6 4 3 5 E 3 6 M 2 1 4 5 3 1 5 D 5 3 L 2 3 5 2 C 1 1 6 2 4 6 K 2 3 4 2 B 1 3 J 2 3 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1 6 A 2 CIRCUIT 2 5 DEFINITION DESIGNATES TERMINALS AND CONTACTS DESIGNATES LAMP LOCATION 1 3 3 4 DESIGNATES MAINTAINED CIRCUITS DESIGNATES OTHER POSITION 8 H DESIGNATES MOMENTARY CIRCUITS DESIGNATES TWO POSITION CONNECTION 2 116 2 5 DESIGNATES EXTERNAL JUMPER PROVIDED BY CUSTOMER www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - II to XIV - Lamp Circuit Diagrams, Hazard Warning Circuit Diagrams Lamp Circuit Diagrams: LAMP CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM LAMP CIRCUIT +8 +8 A/1 1 -7 1 +3 +3 SPECIAL #1 +3 2 2 M/R +1 +3 -4 2 H/Z SPECIAL #3 +1 +3 2 J/8 2 2 1 N/T SPECIAL #4 +3 1 2 -7 +3 -8 1 +6 1 +8 -6 -7 -7 2 -7 +8 2 +6 1 +8 -6 +3 -7 C/3 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM -6 1 L/9 LAMP CIRCUIT -7 1 G/7 +3 +6 1 +1 +3 -4 P/V 2 -6 1 2 -7 -7 +8 +1 +3 E/5 -6 2 +8 -7 D/4 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM -7 +3 B/2 +3 1 F/6 LAMP CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1 2 K/W +6 1 U/Y 2 (-)7 -7 +8 +10 1 2 -7 -9 Hazard Warning Circuit Diagrams: CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1 17 18 10(-) 3 J1 1 2 5 3 14 11 13 CIRCUIT 10(-) J5 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 1 3 5 1 5 3 11 13 3 14 11 13 3 14 15 12 6 16 JK 1 1 5 8 J3 2 8 17 18 10(-) 3 6 JJ 1 5 3 14 NOTE: J circuits are available for all non-locking V-Series styles. Consult factory for p/ n details. JA 17 18 10(-) J2 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 11 13 17 18 2 2 8 CIRCUIT 8 17 18 10(-) SYMBOL LEGEND 1 J4 SYM. DEFINITION DESIGNATES TERMINALS AND CONTACTS DESIGNATES LAMP LOCATION 2 5 www.carlingtech.com 117 V-Series Contura Rotary Switches - Introduction Rotary V-Series CONTURA ROTARY SWITCHES The V-Series Contura Rotary Switch was designed for maximum performance and reliability leveraging the features of the widely popular V-series Contura Rocker Switches. Available in maintained and momentary circuit options, the V-Series Rotary features a sturdy knob construction, up to three separate LEDs, and fits in an industry standard panel opening. Internally, the V-Series Contura Rotary uses a patented mechanism that translates rotary to linear motion. This allows for common switch functionality and terminal connections with the V-Series rocker version and requires no harness change. A secondary CAM, which helps drive the mechanism, provides definitive detent positions and prevents the switch from stopping between positions, while improving tactile feel. The V-Series Rotary also features an innovative PC board that supports the LED and surface mount resistors; and IP67 sealing protection above panel by utilizing LED and actuator stem seals. Together, these features make the V-Series Contura Rotary switch the best choice available in the market today. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Watch Product Video Product Highlights: Accommodates up to three separate LEDs Patented mechanism translates rotary into linear motion Secondary CAM for definitive detent positions PC Board supports LED and surface mount resistors IP67 sealing protection above panel Common terminal & circuit functionality with V-Series Rocker switches, with no harness change required 118 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Rotary Switches - Design Features V-Series Rotary Switch DESIGN FEATURES OPTIONAL PANEL SEAL Prevents water/dust ingress behind panel LEDS Up to three separate LEDs www.carlingtech.com SEALS LED and stem seals provide IP67 protection above panel ROTARY & LINEAR ACTUATOR Patented mechanism that translates rotary to linear motion PC BOARD Supports LEDs and surface mount resistors TERMINALS Same pinout as V-Series Rocker Switches, requiring no harness change SECONDARY CAM Provides definitive detent positions with ball & spring located in rotary actuator 119 V-Series Contura Rotary Switches - General Specifications Electrical Mechanical Rating Circuit Voltage Max Current Resistive 2 Position Maintain 2 Position Momentary 3 Position All 2 Position Maintain 2 Position Momentary 12 12 12 24 24 20 20 20 15 15 3 Position All 24 15 Dielectric Strength 1500 Volts RMS Insulation Resistance 50 Megohms Initial Contact Resistance 10 Milli Ohm max @ 4VDC Life 50,000 Cycles Two Position 25,000 Cycles Two Position Momentary and All Three position Terminals 0.250” (6.3mm) Quick Connect Physical Function Circuits Double Pole Single Throw, DPST Double Pole Double Throw, DPDT Operation Two and Three Position Maintained and Momentary Knob Rotation Two Position 60 Degrees Three Position 30 Degrees from Center Illumination LED; Red, Green, Amber, Yellow, White, Blue Seals LED O-ring(s) – Silicone, Bezel gasket – Neoprene, Knob seal - NBR Flammability Exceeds FVMSS 302 Requirements, Exterior Components, UL 94 V-2 or Better Interior Components, UL 94 HB or Better Base Polyester, PBT Bracket Nylon 66, PA Knob Polybutylene Terephthalate, PBT 6.5%GF Lens Polycarbonate, PC Connector Nylon 66, PA Mounting Front Panel Snap In, 1.450” (36.83mm) X 0.830” (21.08mm) Panel Thickness, 0.030” – 0.187” (0.76 – 4.75mm) Mechanical Life Knob Impact Environmental Sealing Dust Corrosion Chemical Splash Salt Spray Vibration Random Vibration Sinusoidal Shock Handling Shock Thermal Shock Moisture Resistance Thermal Cycling Ignition Protection UV Protection ESD 100,000 Cycles Maintained Circuits 50,000 Cycles Momentary Circuits 50 Gram weight dropped from a height of 18 inches on Top & Sides IP67, in accordance with IEC 60529, BS 5490, DIN 40050 & NFC 20 010. This rating applies to front panel components of the actual switch only, and signifies protection against dust and the prolonged effects of immersion under pressure. Mil STD 810, Method 510.2 Air Velocity 300 Ft/Min Duration 16Hr IEC 68-2-60 Mixed Flowing Gas (MFG) 14 Days Gasoline, Diesel, Motor Oil, Brake Fluid, Ammonia, Armour All Mil STD 202G, Method 101, Test Condition A 96 Hr Mil STD 202G, Method 214 test Condition C 10G’s RMS Mil STD 202G, Method 204D, Test Condition A 0.06DA or 10G’s 10-500Hz MIL-STD 202G, Method 213B Test Condition K, 30G’s 1 Meter Drop onto Hard Surface MIL-STD 202G, Method 107G Test Condition A -55 C to 85 C MIL-STD 202G, Method 106F 10, 25 C to 65 C Cycles 95% RH 25 Cycles -40 C to 85 C ISO 8846 with EC Directive 94/25/EC for Marine Products 300 hr Xenon Arc, 1.4W/m2 wavelength 420 nm Human Static Discharge, +/- 15KV applied during normal operation Shipping/Handling, frequency range 200-2000 MHz applied voltage is +8KV to +15KV and -8KV to -15KV 3 discharge cycles *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 120 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Rotary Switches - Ordering Scheme RV 21 D 2 B 6 0 0 B 1 Series 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 1 1 SERIES RV Rotary Contura 2 CIRCUIT 1 Terminal Connections as viewed ( ) - momentary from bottom of switch: 8 - - 7 DP - double pole uses 1, 2, 3 and 4, 5, 6. 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position:1 2 3 DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 21 ON NONE OFF 22 (ON) NONE OFF 23 ON NONE(OFF) 24 ON NONE ON 26 ON OFF ON 28 (ON) OFF (ON) SPECIAL CIRCUITS 55 (ON) OFF ON 61 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3, 4 & 5 1 & 2, 4 & 5 62 2 & 3, 5 & 6 2 & 3 OFF 64 (2 & 3, 5 & 6) 2 & 3 OFF 3 RATING 1 .4VA 28VDC Resistive B 15A 24V D 20A 12V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 8 Term 10 Term TerminationJumper 1 2 .250 TAB (QC) - no barriers No AB .250 TAB (QC) - with barriers No 4, 5 4, 5 J K .250 TAB (QC) - no barriers Yes (T2 to T5) Notes: 1 Switch circuit uses terminals 1,2,3,4,5 & 6. Terminals 7,8,9 & 10 are for lamp circuit only. 2 Jumper between terminals 2 & 5 for Circuits 61, 62, & 64 to be specified in the Termination & Jumper selection. 3 Circuit 61 may be used for SP, OFF-ON-ON circuit. 4 Base will not have terminal insulating barriers when connector and/or jumpers are used. 5 Code J,K are optional for circuits 62 and 64. Customer may provide externally wired jumper to connect terminals 2 and 5. 6 Lamp #1 located at top end of switch, above terminal 4. Lamp #2 located at top end of switch between terminals 1 & 4. Lamp #3 located at top end of switch, above terminal Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to L.E.D. lamps only. 7 Mounting hole size is 1.450” (36.83mm) by 0.830” (21.08mm). To mount multiple switches in single panel cut-out order optional interlocking mounting panels. 8 Lens color for L.E.D.s must be clear, white, or match color of L.E.D. 7 Lamp 2 8 Lamp 3 9 Bracket 5 ILLUMINATION 6, 8 Sealed Lamps S NONE A # 1 B # 1 C # 1 & # 3 D # 1 & # 3 E # 1 # 2 # 3 F # 1 # 2 # 3 G # 1 # 3 H # 2 J # 1 # 2 K # 1 # 2 L # 1 # 2 M # 2 # 3 N # 2 # 3 P # 2 # 3 R # 3 T # 3 K R C 10 Actuator 11 Lens 12 Knob Color when illuminated Terminals Independent Dependent Independent Independent Dependent Dependent Independent Independent Independent Dependent Independent Dependent Dependent Independent Independent Independent Independent Dependent Dependent Dependent Independent Independent Independent Dependent Dependent Independent Dependent Independent Dependent 8+ 3+ 8+ 10+ 3+ 1+ 8+ 9+ 10+ 3+ 9+ 1+ 3+ 8+ 8+ 8+ 10+ 3+ 1+ 3+ 8+ 8+ 10+ 3+ 1+ 10+ 1+ 8+ 1+ 77777777777777777777777777777- 6, 7, 8 LAMP #1, 2 AND OR LAMP #3 6, 8 Selection 6: above terminal 7; Selection 8: above terminal 8 No lamp 0 LED RedAmber Green Blue White 12VDC CN H E 6 24VDC DP J K 8 9 BRACKET COLOR & PANEL SEAL 7 Color No Gasket 1 Gasket 2 Gasket Black BC D Gray GH J White WY Z 10 ACTUATOR STYLE K Rotary Knob (Standard) ACTUATOR ORIENTATION ABOVE TERMINALS 4 1 11 LENS COLOR 8 No Lens Z Clear WhiteAmber Green Red Blue 4 9E KRW 12 KNOB COLOR Black GrayRed White C HS Y www.carlingtech.com 121 V-Series Contura Rotary Switches - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] 1.400 [35.56] 1.700 [43.18] .845 [21.47] 1.079 [27.40] 1.550 [39.37] 10 TERMINAL BASE W/ BARRIERS .960 [24.38] 1.126 [29.24] .250 [6.35] X .031[.78] .353 [8.64] .820 [20.83] .960 [24.38] 10 TERMINAL BASE W/O BARRIERS 8 7 1 4 2 5 3 6 10 9 BOTTOM VIEW TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT 10 TERMINAL BASE SWITCH SHOWN WITH VC1 CONNECTOR 10 TERMINAL 1.266 [32.16] 1.318 [33.48] 122 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Rotary Switches - Circuit Diagrams Circuits Diagrams: LEGEND SYMBOL DEFINITION TERMINAL LOCATION MAINTAINED CIRCUIT MOMENTARY CIRCUIT INTERNAL CONNECTION (JUMPER TERMINAL) 2 POSITION CONNECTION 2 POSITION CONNECTION P1 P3 2 POSITION P1 P2 P3 3 POSITION www.carlingtech.com 123 V-Series Contura Rotary Switches - Lamp Circuit Diagrams Lamp Circuit Diagrams: 124 www.carlingtech.com V-Charger Dual Port USB 2.0 Charger– Introduction V-Charger V-Charger V-SERIES DUAL PORT USB 2.0 CHARGERS Carling Technologies USB V-Charger is designed to charge tablets, e-readers, mobile and gaming devices, digital cameras, as well as other compatible electronic devices. Providing a total current of 3.15 amps, the V-Charger delivers fast charging times even in extreme temperatures from -40˚C to +80˚C. This innovative product safeguards its electronics with integrated over-current and thermal overload protection, as well as optional load dump circuitry, assuring prolonged safe and reliable operation. The center LED indicates charging is in progress. Snap-in mounting for an industry standard 1.450” x .830” panel cutout makes installation easy. *Additionally, the V-Charger’s double torsion spring-loaded access doors automatically close and provide effortless IP64 sealing protection with precision-fit silicone rubber seals. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Watch Product Video Product Highlights: Dual USB Charging Ports 3.15 Amps for Faster Charging 10,000 Operating Cycles per Port IP64 Sealing Protection 12-24 V Operating Voltage Protection for Internal Components www.carlingtech.com 125 V-Charger Dual Port USB 2.0 Charger - Dual Port USB 2.0 Charger V-Charger DESIGN FEATURES DUAL USB 2.0 PORTS Total current of 3.15 amps, facilitating faster charges SEALING PROTECTION Silicone rubber seal perfectly mates with door indent to provide IP64 level of sealing protection 126 SPRING LOADED DOORS Stylish, wing-shaped double doors automatically close to cover and seal each port when not in use PANEL SEAL Prevents water ingress beneath panel to protect critical connections LED Green LED brightens to indicate charging is in progress MOUNTING Fits industry standard panel opening size of 1.450” x .830” www.carlingtech.com V-Charger Dual Port USB 2.0 Charger - General Specifications Electrical USB Type 2.0 Number of USB Ports 2 Operating Voltage 12V/24V DC power systems (9 to 29 VDC) Output Voltage 5 VDC ± 5% Max Output Current 3.15A DC Total Current Draw (No Load) 12V: 0.8 mA, 24V: 1.9 mA LED Indicator Green LED brightens when charging is in progress. Compatibility Charges mobile devices including iPad, iPhone, iPod, HTC, Galaxy, Blackberry, MP3 Players, Digital Cameras and PDA’s Life 10,000 operating cycles per port minimum Terminals Copper/silver plating 1/4” (6.3 mm) Quick Connect terminations Reverse Polarity Operational with correct polarity after reverse polarity exposure ESD 15kV air, 8 kV touch Overcurrent Protection Short Circuit Thermal Overload Protection Operation will cease if internal temperature reaches 125°C. Charging will resume after sufficient heat loss Physical Panel Opening Panel Thickness Panel Mounting Method Seals Depth Behind Panel Connection Weight Styling Port Protection 1.450” x .830” .030 - .156 inches Front Panel Insertion Silicone and Poron See Figures 1 and 2 VC1, VC2 55g (0.12 lbs) Curved USB port doors Twin, self-closing doors Environmental Sealing IP64 for front panel components when USB Ports are covered Operating Temperature -40° to +60°C at 3.15A -40° to +70°C at 2.4A -40° to +80°C at 2.1A Vibration 1 Mil-Std 202G, Method 204D, Test Condition A. 0.06DA or 10G, 10-500 Hz Shock Mil-Std 202G, Method 213B, Test Condition K @ 30-G. No loss of circuit during test. Chemical Splash Brush method with USB doors closed: diesel, gasoline, brake fluid, Windex, Armor All Thermal Shock MIL-Std 202F, Method 107D, Test Condition A, -55° to +85°C. Test Criteria: Remains functional without damage Moisture Resistance Mil-Std 202G, Method 106G. Test Criteria: Remains functional without damage Thermal Cycling 25 Cycles -40° to +85°C, 2 hours for each temperature every cycle Salt Spray Mil-Std 202G, Method 101E, Test Condition A Dust Mil-Std 841C Method 510.2 Air Velocity 300 ± 200 Ft/min, test duration: 16 Hr Mechanical Endurance 10,000 door cycles minimum *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 127 V-Charger Dual Port USB 2.0 Charger - Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Ordering Scheme V 1 Series USB 2 Product Type 24 3 Source Voltage G 1 1 4 LED Indicator 5 Circuit Protection 6 Termination 1 SERIES V 6 TERMINATION 1 .250 Tab 2 PRODUCT TYPE USB Charger 7 DOOR STYLE 1 Curved 3 SOURCE VOLTAGE 24 24 / 12 Volts DC 8 DOOR COLOR B Black 4 LED INDICATOR (VOLTAGE MATCHES SOURCE) G Green 9 FRAME COLOR B Black 5 CIRCUIT PROTECTION 1 Reverse Polarity, Thermal Overload & Overcurrent 10 PANEL SEAL 1 Yes 1 B B 1 7 Door Style 8 9 10 Door Color Base Color Panel Seal Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] NEGATIVE ( – ) POSITIVE ( + ) Notes: 1 Charger to install into 1.450” X 0.830” panel opening 128 www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Stand-Alone Components Reduce inventory levels and cost by stocking actuators and base switches separately. Contura II, III, IV, V, VI, VII, X, XI, XII, XIV Base switches separately: specify V with code selections 2-8 in the ordering schemes. Contura II, III, IV, V Actuator only: VV with code A or C for selection 9, & with selections 10-14 in the ordering schemes. Contura VI Actuator with lenses and inserts only: VV with code selections 9-16 Contura II, III, IV, V, VII Actuator only: VV with code A, C, E, G, P or Z for selection 9 & with selections 10-14 in the ordering schemes. Contura X, XI, XII, XIV actuators with lenses separately: VV with code selections 9-14 in the ordering schemes. Panel Seal: VPS Contura X & XI actuators without lenses separately: VVR 6 1 00 1 1 Actuator Separately 2 3 Actuator Lens Style/Color Opening 4 Actuator Legend Contura XII actuators without lenses separately: VVP J 1 Z 21 1 00 5 Legend Orientation 1 Actuator 2 Style & Color 3 Lens Opening 4 Lens Opening 6 7 Legend Legend Orientation 5 Legend 1 CONTURA X & XI ACTUATOR SEPARATELY VVR 1 CONTURA XII ACTUATOR SEPARATELY VVP 2 ACTUATOR STYLE & COLOR Black Gray WhiteRed Contura X 1234 Contura XI 6789 2 ACTUATOR STYLE & COLOR JBlack K Gray N White M Red 3,4 LENS OPENING FOR Z No lens 1 Bar lens Square lens 3 LENS OPENING FOR 1 1 One bar lens 2 One bar lenses 3 One square lens 4 two square lens 5 square lens on top/ bar lens on bottom (Contura X only) 4 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND 00 - No Legend this location 11 ON 12 OFF 13 I 14 O OFF ON O I 15 O O 16 O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. 5 LEGEND ORIENTATION 1 0 No legend 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 5, 7 LENS OR BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend 21 22 OFF ON 2 Color posts mount toward actuator stem 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I F N F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL 6 LEGEND ORIENTATION 3 0 No legend 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 ORIENTATION 1 ORIENTATION 2 ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL ORIENTATION 1 Contura X, XI & XII actuator lens assembly separately: ORIENTATION 4 VVL 2 1 00 0 ORIENTATION 2 1 Lens Separately top lens bottom lens } 3 Lens Color 4 Legend 5 Legend Orientation 2 LENS STYLE 3 1 Bar lens 2 One Piece Square lens 3 Bottom of Two-Piece Square lens 5 1 TOP OF LENS SEPARATELY VVT 2 COLOR 1 Clear 2 Smoke 2 Lens Style 1 CONTURA X, XI & XII LENS SEPARATELY VVL 3 White 3 TRANSLUCENT LENS COLOR 1 Clear2 White3 Amber4 Green 45 Red6 Blue 4 Contura X, XI & XII actuator lens assembly: actuator stem 24 I Contura X, XI & XII top piece of 2-piece lens separately: 1 Lens Separately 23 O ORIENTATION 3 VVT 1 2 4 LENS OR BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend 21 22 OFF ON two piece lens assembly 23 O 24 I 1 piece lens/bar lens are positioned the same as bottom lens for assembly, minus the top lens. Lenses snap in from bottom. Notes: 1 If actuator lens opening for 2 bar or 2 square lenses, legend orientation 0,1, or 2 must be chosen. 2 Center of actuator marking not available for Contura XII. 3 Legend is not available for bar style lens. 4 Not recommended with neon lamps. 5 Must also order top piece of 2 piece square lens separately. 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I F N F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at www.carlingtech.com. 5 LEGEND ORIENTATION 3 0 No legend 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL ORIENTATION 1 ORIENTATION 4 ORIENTATION 2 ORIENTATION 3 www.carlingtech.com 129 V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Accessories Easily integrate Contura products into your system, with Contura Accessories Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE PART NO Contura Connectors COMPANY SERIES WIRE RANGE TIN GUIDE PLAIN Q.C. SELECTION AWG PLATED BRASS PART NO BRASS COMPANY SERIES (REF) WIRE RANGE 12 02965580 ORIENTATION MM 2 3.0 ORIENTIN 02965471 (2)16-14 2GUIDE PLAIN TATION Q.C. SELECTION Q.C.12010601 SELECTION GUIDE Q.C. GUIDE MM(2)1.0-2.0 AWGSELECTION PLATED BRASS 02965470 16-14 (REF) 1.0-2.0 BRASS WIRE WIRE WIRE PART NO PART NO PART NO PACKARD 58 SERIES B RANGE .5-.8 RANGE 02965469 06288318RANGE 02965580 12 20-18 ORIEN3.0 COMPANY COMPANY ORIENTIN TIN 10 5.0 12084590 2TIN 2 SERIES PLAIN SERIES PLAIN PLAIN TATION TATION 02965471 PLATED 12010601 (2)16-14 (2)1.0-2.0 AWG MM AWG MM AWG MM 2 PLATED PLATED BRASS BRASS12052224 BRASS (REF) 12 3.0 (REF) BRASS BRASS BRASS 02965470 16-14 1.0-2.0 B (REF) COMPANY SERIES PACKARD 58 SERIES 02965580 0296558012015870 12 12 16-14 1.0-2.0 06288318 1202965580 20-18 3.0 .5-.8 3.0 PACKARD 02965469 12010601 12010601 12010601 (2)1.0-2.0 02965471 (2)16-14 (2)16-14 02965471 (2)16-14 02965471(2)1.0-2.0 12020035 (2)22-18 (2).5-.8 METRI-PACKPACKARD PACKARD PACKARD 10 5.0 12084590 Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE 02965470 02965470 16-14 02965470 1.0-2.0 16-14 B1.0-2.0 16-14 SERIES58 58630 SERIES SERIES 58 SERIES 12015869 20-18 .5-.8 12015832 12052224 12 .5-.8 02965469 06288318 02965469 20-18 06288318 02965469 20-18 062883183.0 .5-.8 20-18 WIRE PART NO 12052222 20-22 .35-.5 12015870 16-14 RANGE 1.0-2.05.0 10 5.0 10 10 12084590 12084590 12084590 PACKARD COMPANY ORIENTIN12052224 12052224 12 (2)22-18 3.012052224 12 3.0 12 2 PLAIN TATION METRI-PACK SERIES 12020035 (2).5-.8 1.3-3 AWG 16-12 MM Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE PLATED 60253-2 60253-1 BRASS 12015870 BRASS 16-14 12015870 1.0-2.0 16-14 12015870 1.0-2.0 16-14 630PACKARD SERIES AMP PACKARD PACKARD 12015832 12015869 20-18 (2) .5-.8 (2) 1.3 16 (REF) WIRE 250 SERIES METRI-PACK 12020035 (2)22-18 12020035 (2).5-.8 (2)22-18 12020035 A (2).5-.8 (2)22-18 METRI-PACK 02965580 METRI-PACK PART NO 12 3.0 12052222 20-22RANGE .35-.5 20-18 630 SERIES 630 SERIES 630 SERIES42100-2 18-14 .8-2 FASTIN-FASTON 42100-1 12015869 20-18 12015869 20-18 12015869 12015832 12015832 12015832 COMPANY ORIEN12010601 (2)16-14.5-.8 (2)1.0-2.0 .5-.8 02965471 TIN PACKARD 2 .35-.5 SERIES PLAIN TATION 16-12 1.3-3 12052222 PLATED 20-22 12052222 20-22 12052222 20-22 60295-2 22-18 .3-.9 60295-1 02965470 16-14.35-.5 1.0-2.0 B AWG MM 58 SERIES 60253-1BRASS 60253-2 AMP (REF) BRASS 02965469 06288318 20-18 16-12 (2) 16-12 .5-.8 16-12 161.3-3 (2) 1.31.3-3 ORIENTATION TANG 3.0 (2)1.0-2.0 A B1.0-2.0 .5-.8 A B 5.0 TANG 3.0 1.0-2.0 A(2).5-.8B .5-.8 TANG TANG SYMBOL = TANG SHOWS ORIENTATION OF TANG IN SLOT SYMBOL TANG A TANG SYMBOL = SHOWS ORIENTATION OF TANG IN SLOT .35-.5 SYMBOL TANG SYMBOL =TANGSHOWS SYMBOL =TANG SYMBOL = ORIENTATION SHOWS OFORIENTATION TANG IN SHOWS SLOT OFORIENTATION TANG IN SLOT OF TANG IN SLOT 1.3-3 SYMBOL SYMBOL SYMBOL 60253-2 60253-2 60253-2 60253-1 60253-1 60253-1 250 SERIES AMPConsult Delphi AMP Packard AMP 12084590 NOTE: and/or Amp on actual part numbers and availability. B 02965580 12 3.0 10 5.0 (2) 16 18-14 (2) 1.3 (2) 16 .8-2(2) 1.3 (2) 16 (2) 1.3 FASTIN-FASTON 42100-1 42100-2 250 SERIES 250 SERIES 250 SERIES B B AMP is a registered trademark of AMP Inc. Harrisburg, PA B TANG 12010601 (2)16-14 (2)1.0-2.0 12052224 12 3.0 42100-2 18-14 42100-2 .8-218-14 42100-2 .8-218-14 .8-2 FASTIN-FASTON FASTIN-FASTON 42100-1 02965471 FASTIN-FASTON 42100-1 42100-1 Delphi Packard is 02965470 a registered trademark 22-18 of Delphi-Packard Systems Warren, Ohio PACKARD 60295-1 60295-2 .3-.9 Electrical 16-14 1.0-2.0 B 12015870 16-14 1.0-2.0 60295-1 58 SERIES PACKARD METRI-PACK 60295-2 60295-1 02965469 22-18 60295-2 22-18 60295-2 60295-1 .3-.9 06288318 12020035 20-18 (2)22-18 .3-.9 22-18 .5-.8 (2).5-.8 .3-.9 A NOTE: Delphi Packard and/or Amp on actual part numbers and availability. .820[20.83] 630 SERIES NOTE:Consult Consult Delphi NOTE: Packard Consult and/or Delphi NOTE: Amp Packard Consult on actual and/or Delphi part Amp numbers Packard on actual and/or and part availability. Amp numbers on actual and part availability. numbers and availability. 12015869 20-18 .5-.8 12015832 10 5.0 12084590 .820[20.83] AMP a registered registered trademark oftrademark AMP Inc.ofHarrisburg, PA AMP is is a AMP trademark is a registered of AMP AMP Inc. is Harrisburg, a registered AMP PA trademark Inc. Harrisburg, of AMP PAInc. Harrisburg, PA TANG 12052224 12of 3.0 of 12052222 20-22 .35-.5 Delphi Packard Packard is is Delphi a registered Packard trademark is trademark Delphi a registered ofPackard Delphi-Packard trademark is a registered Electrical Delphi-Packard trademark Systems Electrical Warren, Delphi-Packard Systems Ohio Warren, Electrical Warren, Ohio Systems Ohio ORIENTATION OF TANG IN SLOT Delphi a registered of Delphi-Packard Electrical Systems TANGOhio SYMBOL Warren, = SHOWS 12015870 1.0-2.0 16-14 16-12 1.3-3 PACKARD SYMBOL 60253-2 60253-1 AMP .820[20.83] .820[20.83] (2)22-18 (2).5-.8 A METRI-PACK (2) 16 (2) 1.3 .820[20.83] .820[20.83] .820[20.83]12020035 .820[20.83] 250.820[20.83] SERIES B 630 SERIES .820[20.83] 12015869 20-18 .5-.8 12015832 42100-2 18-14 .8-2 FASTIN-FASTON 42100-1 12052222 20-22 .35-.5 60295-2 22-18 .3-.9 60295-1 TANG SYMBOL = SHOWS ORIENTATION OF TANG IN SLOT 16-12 1.3-3 SYMBOL NOTE: AMP Consult Delphi Packard Amp on actual part numbers and availability. 60253-1and/or60253-2 .770[19.56] (2) 16 PA (2) 1.3 AMP is a registered trademark of AMP Inc. Harrisburg, 250 SERIES B Delphi Packard is a registered trademark of Delphi-Packard Electrical Systems Warren, Ohio 42100-2 18-14 .8-2 FASTIN-FASTON 42100-1 .920[23.37] A B A B PACKARDPACKARD 630 630 PACKARD 630 VC1 VC1 B AMP, PACKARD AMP, PACKARD 58 58 PACKARD 630 VC1 VC1 B B .820[20.83] A AMP, 58 AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARD AMP, PACKARD 58 58 PACKARD AMP, PACKARD 58 VC1 B VC2 PACKARD 630 VC2 VC1 B A PACKARD 630 VC2 VC2 1.266[32.16] AMP AMP AMPAMP AMP AMP 5 B AMP AMP, PACKARD 58 679 VC2 4 73 45 2 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] 1.266[32.16] .770[19.56] .950[24.13] B 69 15 8 6 A PACKARD 630 VC2 9 .920[23.37] B 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] 1.266[32.16] A VC2 VC2 VC2 10 10 3 23 1VC1 1053 630 6729 417VC1 845 56 96 9 10 73 4 2 51 689 10 10 3 3 2 128 1 7104 8 3 5 2 619 8 7 4 28 10 1 38 2 1 784PACKARD .920[23.37] 1.170[29.72] 1.170[29.72] 1.170[29.72] A PACKARD 630 B 1.170[29.72] .820[20.83] B AMPAMP, PACKARD 58 .920[23.37] .770[19.56] .770[19.56] .920[23.37] 60295-2 22-18 .3-.9 60295-1 .820[20.83] .920[23.37] .820[20.83] .920[23.37] .920[23.37] .920[23.37] .920[23.37] NOTE: Consult Delphi Packard and/or Amp on actual partAnumbers and availability. A AMP is a registered trademark of AMP Inc. Harrisburg, PA VC2 A A A A A .920[23.37] .920[23.37] PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 Delphi Electrical Systems Warren, Ohio VC1Packard is a registered trademark of Delphi-Packard VC1 PACKARD 630 .770[19.56] .770[19.56] B A B B B AMP, 58 PACKARD 58AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARDPACKARD 58 AMP, AMP, PACKARD PACKARD 58 630 3 2 1 8 7 3 4 235 1 62 8 1.466[37.24] 1 87 4 .950[24.13] 1.170[29.72] 1.466[37.24] 1.266[32.16] A A A 1.170[29.72] PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 .950[24.13] .950[24.13] .950[24.13] PACKARD 630 1.466[37.24] 1.250[31.75] B PACKARD 630 A PACKARD PACKARD 630 630 1.250[31.75] 5 A B B AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARD PACKARD 630 58 6 7 4 5 6 7 4 5 6 1.250[31.75]B AMP 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] .770[19.56] 1.250[31.75] AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP, PACKARD 58 10MARKING 3 2 DETAIL 1A 8 MARKING DETAIL 7MARKING 4DETAIL 5DETAIL 69 A 10 3 VC22 1 DETAIL 8 7 4 5 6MARKING 9 MARKING 3 2MARKING 1 8 DETAIL 7 4 5DETAIL 6 MARKING MARKING DETAIL MARKING MARKING DETAIL DETAIL MARKING MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL DETAIL DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING AMP, PACKARD 58 1.466[37.24] AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP A PACKARD 630 FRONT VIEWB MARKING VC1 FRONT VIEW DETAIL 1.266[32.16] FRONT VIEW AMP, PACKARD 58 PACKARD 630 .920[23.37] 1.466[37.24] REAR VIEW AMP, PACKARD 58 FRONT VIEW VC1 10 3 2 1 8 VC1 CONNECTOR HOUSING 1.266[32.16] CONNECTOR HOUSING FRONT REARVIEW VIEW AMP, PACKARD 58 8 7 4 5 69 VC1 10 3 2 1 VC1 VC1 CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING A MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL A 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] VC1 PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 VC1 FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW VC1 B CONNECTOR HOUSING MARKING DETAIL VC2 MARKING DETAIL FRONT VIEW AMP 69 1.466[37.24] B AMP, PACKARD 58 AMP (For AMP terminals only) MARKING DETAIL REAR VIEW PACKARD 630 REAR VIEWMARKING FRONT REAR VIEW VIEW .950[24.13] FRONT VIEW DETAIL 1.466[37.24] REAR VIEW AMP CONNECTOR HOUSING MARKING DETAIL (For AMP terminals only) REAR VIEW 10 3 2 1VC2 8 7 4 5 69 CONNECTOR HOUSING VC2 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] CONNECTOR (For AMP HOUSING terminals only) B Contura X Boot (P/N VB1-01) MARKING DETAIL FRONT VIEW FRONT REAR VIEW VIEW DETAIL 1.170[29.72] REAR FRONT VIEW VIEW MARKING B REAR VIEW DETAIL 1.250[31.75] FRONT VIEW MARKING DETAIL FRONT VIEW 1.050[26.67] VC1 CONNECTOR HOUSING 1.050[26.67] VC2 CONNECTOR HOUSING (For AMP terminals only) MARKING DETAIL B FRONT AMP, PACKARDVIEW 58 3 2 1 8 REAR VIEW MARKING DETAIL REAR VIEW AMP, PACKARD 58 10 3 2 1 8 VC2 7 VC2 4 5 69 VCH VC2 VCH 3 VCH 2 1 8 7 4 5 6 CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING CONNECTOR HOUSING A A MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL VCH 1.250[31.75] 1.266[32.16] 1.466[37.24] PACKARD 630 PACKARD 630 (For AMP terminals (Foronly) AMP terminals (For only) AMP terminals only) VC2 VC2 VC2 FRONT VIEW REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW .950[24.13] MARKING DETAIL REAR VIEW 5 FRONT VIEW MARKING 1.266[32.16] .920[23.37] FRONT VIEW AMP AMP, PACKARD 58 7 4 A PACKARD 630 VC1 REARFRONT VIEW VIEW REAR B VIEW MARKING DETAIL MARKING DETAIL REAR VIEW CONNECTOR HOUSING MARKING DETAIL B REAR VIEW AMP, PACKARD 58 VCH 7 4 5 6 HOUSING VCH CONNECTOR 1.250[31.75] CONNECTOR HOUSING Additional V-Series Ratings MARKING DETAIL REAR VIEW 1.050[26.67] 1 MARKING DETAIL FRONT VIEW MARKING DETAIL REAR VIEW VCH CONNECTOR HOUSING .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive VB1-01 VB1-01 4VB1-01 10A 250VAC 1/2 HP, 15A 125 CONTURA X BOOT CONTURA X BOOT CONTURA X BOOT VAC 1/2 HP, No Agency Listings 10A 250VAC 1/2 HP, 15A 125 VAC 1/2 HP, UL Recognized, CSA Certified 51 62 15A 125VAC 1/2 HP, 12(2)A 125 VAC μ T85 1.050[26.67] 15A 125VAC 1/2VB1-01 HP, 12(6)A 125 VAC T85 72 VB1-01 2.000[50.80] CONTURA X BOOT .757[19.23] .757[19.23] 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 82 10A CONTURA X BOOT 1/2 HP 125-250VAC, 12(2)A 250 VAC μ T85 2.000[50.80] 1.050[26.67].757[19.23] VB1-01 15A 125VAC, 1/2 HP 125-250VAC, 12(6)A 250 VAC T85 92 10A 250VAC, 2.000[50.80] CONTURA X BOOT B VB1-01 15A 24V 2.000[50.80] CONTURA X BOOT C 20A 18V .757[19.23] D 20A 12V .757[19.23] E 20A 14V, 10A 14VT (circuits 1, 4, A, & D only) 3.99 [101.35] 3.99 [101.35] .757[19.23] 3.99 [101.35] F 10A 14V, 6A, 14VT (circuit G only) .757[19.23] GVRT 20A 6V VRT VRT ACTUATOR ACTUATOR ACTUATOR REMOVAL H REMOVAL 20A 3V REMOVAL 3.99 [101.35] .900 [22.86] .900 [22.86] .900 [22.86] TOOL TOOL TOOL L bracket) 15A 10A 250VAC, (For flush (For125 flush VAC, bracket) (For flush bracket) 1/2 HP 125-250 VAC; 6A 125 VAC L M VRT.4VA/20A 12V (combi-contact) ACTUATOR REMOVAL .900 [22.86] TOOL (combination gold/silver contacts for borderline dry circuit applications) (For flush bracket) 3.99 [101.35] N .4VA/15A 24V (combi-contact) 3.99 [101.35] VRT(combination gold/silver contacts for borderline dry circuit applications) 3.99 [101.35] 2.000[50.80] 2.000[50.80] 1.050[26.67] 2.000[50.80] 1.050[26.67] Contura II, III, IV & V Actuator TOP TOP TOP INSERT POINTS UNDER INSERT POINTS UNDER INSERT POINTS UNDER ACTUATOR ACTUATOR ACTUATOR HOLD FLUSH ON BRACKET ANDHOLD PUSH FLUSH ON BRACKET AND HOLD PUSH FLUSH ON BRACKET AND PUSH IN IN IN TOP TOP Removal Tool (P/N VRT) TOP TOP INSERT POINTS UNDER ACTUATOR HOLD FLUSH ON BRACKET AND PUSH IN TOP TOP TOP INSERT POINTS UNDER ACTUATOR HOLD FLUSH ON BRACKET AND PUSH IN TOP TOP 130 ACTUATOR REMOVAL TOOL (For flush bracket) VRT ACTUATOR REMOVAL VRT NOTESACTUATOR .900 [22.86] TOOL REMOVAL Consult factory to determine availability for individual circuits and their HP rating. (For flush bracket) .900 [22.86] TOOL flush with bracket) 1. Not (For avaiable Contura 7 or 14 rocker styles. .900 [22.86] INSERT POINTS UNDER TOP ACTUATOR INSERT HOLD POINTSFLUSH UNDER ON BRACKET AND PUSH IN ACTUATOR HOLD FLUSH ON BRACKET AND PUSH TOP IN Ratings 6 - 9 are UL, CSA & VDE certified, require terminations A or B for double pole circuits, & are not available with illumination circuits 4, 8, D, J, N, & T or with wire lead or solder lug terminations. Circuits 1, 4, A, D, H, M & E are not available with rating 6 & 8. Rating 7 & 9 only available with circuits 1, 4, A & D. Circuits 2, 3, 5, 7, 8, K, L are 1/2 HP 250VAC only with rating 8. Ratings 6 & 7 must specify lamp code 1 (125VAC neon). Ratings 8 & 9 must specify lamp code 2 (250VAC neon). Rating L available with circuits 1, 4, A & D only. 2. www.carlingtech.com V-Series Contura Sealed Rocker Switches - Accessories Contura Mounting Panels Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] Contura Hole Plug Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] 1.450 [36.83] .830 [21.08] TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL VHP CONTURA II,III HOLE PLUG 1.240 [31.50] 1.820 [46.23] .430 [10.92] VHP CONTURA II,III HOLE PLUG VH1 STANDARD HOLE PLUG (No wing serrations) (With VC1 connector attached) 2.000 [50.80] VH2 STANDARD HOLE PLUG (With wing serrations) 1.067 [27.10] 1.928 [48.97] VH3 CONTURA IV HOLE PLUG (No wing serrations) VH4 CONTURA IV HOLE PLUG (With wing serrations) DETAIL VIEW VH1,VH3 & VH5 HOLE PLUGS (No wing serrations for ease of removal) 1.020 [25.91] VH5 CONTURA V HOLE PLUG (No wing serrations) www.carlingtech.com VH6 CONTURA V HOLE PLUG (With wing serrations) DETAIL VIEW VH2,VH4 & VH6 HOLE PLUGS (With wing serrations) 131 W–Series Fully Sealed Rocker Switches - Introduction W-Series W-Series SEALED ROCKER SWITCHES Carling Technologies set the standard for performance and aesthetics with the widely successful, often imitated, but never duplicated, V-Series rocker switches. Building further upon that platform, Carling has once again raised the bar with the fully sealed W-Series. The W-Series’ traditional appearance features complete IP68 protection, including below the panel, where the critical connection is made from the wiring harness. When used in conjunction with the integrated connector, the totally submersible W-Series provides a seal for up to ten individual wires, assuring compatibility with even the most complex circuitry. The W-Series also offers a wide variety of accoutrements, including endless illumination options featuring dual level and multicolor LEDs, progressive and hazard warning circuits, ratings up to 10A 24V, choice of paddle, rocker, locking or laser etched actuators, hundreds of standard legend choices and the electrical performance and reliability that is the hallmark of Carling Technologies products. Product Highlights: Fully sealed and submersible IP68 protection, including below the panel Tri-seal design Connector with twin locking tabs 132 www.carlingtech.com W–Series Fully Sealed Rocker Switches - Design Features W-Series Switch DESIGN FEATURES ILLUMINATION Choice of highly reliable SMT LED or incandescent lighting with 21 dependent or independent circuit options. BODY One piece polyester 94V0 seamless body acts as an umbrella to protect critical internal components. TRI-SEAL DESIGN Sealing at actuator, an insert molded neoprene base seal, along with wire lead seals, assures water tight, fully submersible protection. ROLLER PIN Proven reliable mechanism is lubricant free and allows for 100k electrical and 250k mechanical cycles, and withstands extreme temperatures from -40˚C to +85˚C. INTEGRATED CONNECTOR Accommodates Tyco/Amp .110 junior power timer contacts with twin locking tabs to provide a safe, secure, sealed connection. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. www.carlingtech.com 133 W–Series Fully Sealed Rocker Switches - General Specifications Electrical Contact Rating Dielectric Strength Insulation Resistance Initial Contact Resistance Life Contacts Terminals Quick Voltage Overcurrent Mechanical Endurance .4VA @ 24VDC 10 amps, 3-24VDC 1500 Volts RMS 50 Megaohms 10 milliohms max. @ 4 VDC 100,000 cycles Silver tin-oxide, 88/12 Copper with silver or gold plating Connect terminations. 3-24 VDC 15A for 50 cycles 250,000 cycles minimum Physical Lighted LED - rated 100,000 hours 1/2 life (LED is internally ballasted for voltages to 24 VDC) SealsNeoprene Base Polyester blend rated to 125C with a UL flammability rating of 94V0. Actuator Basic actuator structure molded of thermoplastic polycarbonate with a hard Nylon 66 thermoplastic surface overlay. Lens Polycarbonate rated at 100°C Function 2 & 3 Position Rocker Style Operation Maintained & Momentary Base PA 6/6 30GF (glass filled) Actuator PA 6/6 13GF Bracket PBT 10GF Connector PBT 10GF, polarized Environmental Environmental IP68, Fully sealed Corrosion/ Flowing Mixed Gas (FMG) Chemical Splash Class III 3 year accelerated exposure per ASTM B-827, B-845 Operating Temperature -40°C to +85°C, 22 cycles, 300 hours Vibration 1 Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 204D Test Condition A 0.06 DA or 10G’s 10-500 Hz. Vibration 2 Resonance search 24-50 Hz 0.40 DA 50-2000 ±10 G’s peak Results Horizontal Axis 3-5 G’s max. Random 24 Hz 0.06 PSD-Gsq/Hz 60 Hz 0.50 100 Hz 0.50 200 Hz 0.025 2000 Hz 0.025 Handling/Drop One meter onto concrete floor Salt Spray Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 101D, Test Condition A, 48 Hrs. DustIP6X Thermal Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 107F, Test Condition A, -55°C to 85°C Test criteria - pre and post test contact resistance Moisture Resistance/ Humidity Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 106F, Test Criteria - pre and post test contact resistance Mounting Specifications Panel Thickness Range .032 to .125 For optimum panel fit, the following panel thicknesses are suggested: .032, .062, .093, .125 .830[21.08] Actuator Travel (Angular Displacement) 24° full throw 1.450[36.83] TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL SWITCH MOUNTING HOLE 134 www.carlingtech.com W-Series Fully Sealed Rocker Switches - Ordering Scheme 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 8 Bracket 1 SERIES W 2 CIRCUIT ( ) - momentary Terminal Connections as viewed from bottom of switch: SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 3. 8 terminal 10 terminal DP - double pole uses terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 & 6. 8 - - 7 8 - - 7 Terminals 7, 8, 9 & 10 for lamp circuit only. 1 - - 4 1 - - 4 2 - - 5 2 - - 5 3 - - 6 3 - - 6 10 - - 9 Position: 1 2 3 SP DP 2 & 3, 5 & 6 Connected Terminals 1 & 2, 4 & 5 1121 ON NONEOFF 1222 (ON)NONE OFF 1323 ON NONE(OFF) 1424 ONNONE ON 1525 ON NONE(ON) 1626 ONOFF ON 1727 ON OFF(ON) 1828 (ON)OFF (ON) - 49 ONON ON 3 RATING B 10A 24V D 10A 12V G 10A 6V H 10A 3V 4 TERMINATION / BASE STYLE 2 .110 TAB (QC) www.carlingtech.com 10 Lens 11 Lens 0 00 12 Legend 13 14 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 6,7 LAMP (SAME CODING FOR BOTH SELECTIONS) Selection 6: above terminals 1 & 4; Selection 7: above terminals 3 & 6 No lamp 0 LED* superbright Red AmberGreen White 2VDC A LF4 6VDC B MG5 12VDC C NH6 24VDC D PJ8 * Consult factory for “daylight bright”, blue/green and white LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 BRACKET COLOR 1 1 Black 9 ACTUATOR 1,3 3 Black with Laser Etched A Black 10 LENS - ABOVE LAMP #1 TERMINALS 1,4 11 LENS - ABOVE LAMP #2 TERMINALS 3,6 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens ClearWhite Amber Green Red Blue 1 - B G M T - 7 C H N U 3 - D J P V - 9 E K R W 5 A - - - - Large Transparent Large Translucent Bar Transparent Bar Translucent Laser-Etched Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. 12 ACTUATOR LENS OR BODY LEGEND 2 00 - No Legend this location/No actuator 11 ON 12 OFF 13 I 14 O OFF ON O I 15 O O 16 O O 17 O I 18 I O F N N F F F 21 22 23 24 OFF ON O I 25 O 26 O 27 O 28 I F N F For additional legend options & codes, visit us at carlingtech.com 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 2 Orientation 2 3 Orientation 3 4 Orientation 4 Orientation 1 P P Orientation 2 5 ILLUMINATION Lamp #1:above terminals 1&4 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 3&6 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only Actuator Lens Position Lamps Illumination Type Lamp Wired to Terminals O NONE A # 1 Independent 8+ 7B # 1 Down 3+ 7C # 2 Up 3+ 7D # 1 Down 3+ 7 & # 2 Down 1+ 7E # 1 Up 1+ 7 & # 2 Up 3+ 7F # 1 Independent 8+ 7 & # 2 Up 3+ 6G # 1 Independent 8+ 7 & # 2 Up 3+ 7H # 2 Independent 8+ 7Selections for Single Pole Witches Only: J # 1 Down 3+ 8 & # 2 Independent 6+ 7K # 1 Independent 8+ 7 & # 2 Independent 6+ 7Selections for Double Pole Switches Only: L # 1 Down 3+ 6M # 2 Up 3+ 6N # 1 Down 3+ 6 & # 2 Down 1+ 4P # 1 Up 1+ 4 & # 2 Up 3+ 6R # 1 Down 3+ 7 & # 2 Up 6+ 7S # 1 Down 6+ 7 & # 2 Independent 8+ 7U # 1 Independent 8+ 7 & # 2 Independent 10+ 9V # 2 Independent 10+ 9W # 1 Independent 8+ 7 & # 2 Independent 10+ 7Y # 1 & # 2 Independent in Series 8+ 7Z # 1 & # 2 Independent in Parallel 8+ 7- A 7 Z 00 9 Actuator Orientation 4 W 11 D 2 B C 0 1 1 Series P P P AY3-200 P AY3-100 Orientation 3 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 2 00 No legend this location/no actuator (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) Selection 14 required when switch requires two legends. If the two legends consist of one lens & one body legend, lens legend must be specified in selection 12; body legend specified in selection 14. For legend options & codes, visit us at carlingtech.com Notes: 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 White imprinting is standard on black actuators; Black imprinting is standard on white, red & gray actuators; Custom colors are available, consult factory. 3 Locking rocker version is also available, consult factory for details. 135 W-Series Fully Sealed Rocker Switches - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] 1.000 [25.40] 1.724 [43.78] 12° 1.962 [49.83] .418 [10.62] 1.707 [43.36] 2.162 [54.91] .031 [.79] .465 [11.81] 1.664 [42.27] .110 [2.79] SWITCH SHOWN WITH CONNECTOR INSTALLED KEYING FEATURE 1.178 [29.93] .714 [18.14] 1.080 [27.43] WCH CONNECTOR (190-31214-001) 1.200 [30.48] Notes: WCH connector is intended for use with Tyco/Amp .110 Junior Power Timer, female contacts, and wire seals. For 14-16 awg wire, specify Tyco/Amp P/N 927766-3 For 16-20 awg wire, specify Tyco/Amp P/N 927770-3 Tyco/Amp cable seal P/N 828904-1 (20-18 awg wire) or P/N 828905-1 (16-14 awg wire) is required for each individual wire lead, and Tyco/Amp cable plug, P/N 828922-1, is required to seal each unused connector opening. Consult Tyco/Amp for the cable seal recommended for your specific wire gauge and thickness. 136 www.carlingtech.com L–Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Introduction L-Series L-Series SEALED ROCKER SWITCHES The L-Series rocker switch is an innovative product offering total design flexibility, while at the same time setting new standards for performance and reliability. Its versatile design features include a neatly proportioned size that fits into an industry standard mounting hole of 1.734 x .867 (44.0mm x 22.0mm), countless unique choices for ratings, circuits, colors, illuminations and laser etched legends. These single or double pole switches also feature a broad choice of actuator styles, colors, and lenses with up to twelve terminals offering an extensive range of switch and lamp circuit options, including LED or incandescent illumination. Additionally, an optional plug-in terminal connector enables pre-wiring of wire harness. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Watch Product Video Product Highlights: IP67 certified sealed front panel components Withstands temperatures from -40°C to +85°C Vibration, shock, thermoshock, moisture and salt spray resistant www.carlingtech.com 137 L–Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Design Features L-Series Switch DESIGN FEATURES LED LIGHTING Utilize less current and are not affected by vibration, providing long lasting illumination. Available in 3 standard colors. LENS & LEGENDS Lens available in 2 sizes and 6 standard colors in either translucent or transparent materials. Numerous symbols and text available for imprinting or laser etching. SEAL PROTECTION Locks out elements such as water, dust & debris. Certified to IP67 for front panel components. ACTUATOR Available in rocker or paddle styles. Several standard color options also available. ROLLER PIN Eliminates need for lubricants, increasing the temperature range of the switch from -40˚ C to +85˚C [-40˚ F to 185˚ F]. TERMINALS Available with 2 industry standard termination options: .250 or .187 tabs with up to 12 terminal options. BASE Fits into industry standard mounting hole of 1.734 x .867 in [44.0mm x 22.0mm]. *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 138 www.carlingtech.com L–Series Sealed Rocker Switches - General Specifications Electrical Environmental Contact Rating .4VA @ 24VDC (MAX) resistive 15 amps, 125VAC 10 amps, 250VAC 20 amps, 4-14VDC 15 amps, 15-28VDC Dielectric Strength 1250 Volts RMS between pole to pole 3750 Volts RMS between live parts and accessible surfaces Insulation Resistance 50 Megaohms Initial Contact Resistance 10 milliohms max. @ 4 VDC Life 100,000 cycles maintained, 50,000 cycles momentary at rated voltage and current Contacts 90/10 silver-nickel, silver tinoxide, gold Terminals Brass or copper/silver plate 3/16” (4.76mm) & 1/4” (6.3mm) Quick Connect terminations standard. Environmental IP67 for above panel components of the actual switch, representing an index of protection as applied to electrical equipment in accordance with IEC 529, BS 5490, DIN 400 50 & NFC 20 010. Corrosion Mixed Flowing Gas MFG Class III per ASTM B-827 & B-845, Method H, with 3 years exposure. Operating Temperature -40°C to + 85°C Vibration 1 Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 204D Test Condition A 0.06 DA or 10G’s 10-500 Hz. Tested with VCH connector. Test criteria - No loss of circuit during test and pre and post test contact resistance. Vibration 2 Resonance search 24-50 Hz 0.40 DA 50-2000 ±10 G’s peak Results Horizontal Axis 3-5 G’s max. Random 24 Hz 0.06 PSD-Gsq/Hz 60 Hz 0.50 100 Hz 0.50 200 Hz 0.025 2000 Hz 0.025 No loss of circuit during test; <10µ chatter. Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 213B, Test Condition K @ 30G’s. Tested with VCH connector. Test criteria - No loss of circuit during test, pre, and post test contact resistance. Salt Spray Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 101D, Test Condition A, 48 Hrs. Thermal Shock Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 107F, Test Condition A, -55°C to 85°C. Test criteria - pre and post test contact resistance. Moisture Resistance Per Mil-Std 202F, Method 106F, Test Criteria - pre and post test contact resistance. Mechanical Endurance 250,000 cycles minimum Physical Lighted Incandescent - rated 10,000 hours LED - rated 100,000 hours 1/2 life (LED is internally ballasted for voltages to 24 VDC) Seals Rocker, base & bracket are sealed. Base Nylon 66 GF rated to 85°C with a flammability rating of 94V0. Actuator Basic actuator structure molded of thermoplastic polycarbonate with a hard Nylon 66 thermoplastic surface overlay. LockAcetal Lens Polycarbonate rated at 100°C Function 2 & 3 Position Rocker Style Bracket Nylon Zytel 1.970 Connector Nylon 66 rated at 85°C. Polarized. Actuator Travel (Angular Displacement) .260 [6.60] .390 [9.91] 2 position 3 positions 26° 13° from center .867 [22.02] 1.734 [44.04] 1.020 [25.91] TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL MOUNTING HOLE .100 [2.54] 2.265 [57.53] 3.055 [77.60] Panel Thickness Range Acceptable Panel Thickness .030 to .156 (.76mm to 3.96mm) Recommended: .030, .062, .093, .125 and .156 .230 X .031 [5.84 X .79] T1 BAT T2 OUTPUT (LOAD) T3 GROUND 1.300 [33.02] www.carlingtech.com .344 [8.74] 1.570 [39.88] Mounting Specifications PADDLE STYLE ACTUATOR Q.C. SELECTION GUIDE COMPANY SERIES 139 WIRE GAGE PACKARD PART NO. AWG MM 2 12084590 12 3.0 L-Series Sealed Rocker Switches – Ordering Scheme L 11 E 3 C H N 1 2 Circuit 3 Rating 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lamp 7 Lamp 1 SERIES L 2 CIRCUIT 2 Terminal Orientation 9 Actuator 1 48 10 11 12 Lens Style Lens Style Legend & Color & Color 13 14 Legend Actuator Orientation Lens Legend 5 ILLUMINATION Lamp #1:above terminals 9 & 10 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 11 & 12 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only. ( ) - momentary SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 4. DP - double pole uses terminals 5, 6 & 8. Terminals 9, 10 & 11 for lamp circuit only. Position:1 2 SP DP 2 & 4, 6 & 8 Connected Terminals 1121 ONNONE 1222 (ON)NONE 1323 ONNONE 1424 ONNONE 1525 ON NONE 1626 ONOFF 1727 ON OFF 1828 (ON) OFF CIRCUITS WITH JUMPER TERMINALS 30* (2,4&5), (1,6&8) OFF, OFF 31 1, 2 & 5 2, 3 & 7 PROGRESSIVE CIRCUITS 51 3 & 4 2, 3 52 3 & 4 2, 3 53 (3 & 4) 2, 3 54 (3 & 4) 2, 3 55 (3 & 4) 2, 3 56 (3 & 4) 2, 3 57 3 & 4 2, 3 58* 2 & 4 2, 3 61 3 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 3, 6 & 7 62 3 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 3, 6 & 7 63 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 64 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 65 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 66 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 67 3 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 3, 6 & 7 68 2 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 4, OFF 69* 2 & 4, 1, 7 & 8 2 & 4, OFF 70 (2 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 4, 5 & 7 71 (2&4), (7 & 8) 2 & 4, 5 & 7 72 2 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 4, 5 & 7 73 (2 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 4, OFF 80 2 & 4, 6 & 8 2 & 4, OFF HAZARD WARNING CIRCUITS A2 6,7 & 8, 3 & 4 NONE A3 6,7 & 8, 2 & 4 NONE * Available with ratings 1, 4, & E only. 3 1 & 2, 5 & 6 OFF OFF (OFF) ON (ON) ON (ON) (ON) (1,2&8), (4,5&6) 2, 4 & 8 1&2 OFF 1&2 (OFF) (1 & 2) (OFF) (OFF) 1&2 1 & 2, 5 & 6 OFF, OFF 1 & 2, 5 & 6 OFF, OFF (1 & 2), (5 & 6) (OFF, OFF) (OFF, OFF) OFF, OFF OFF, OFF (1 & 2), (5 & 7) 1 & 2, 5 & 7 1 & 2, 5 & 7 OFF, OFF OFF, 5 & 6 OFF, 1 & 2 OFF, 1 & 2 3 RATING 2 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive 4 10A 250VAC 1/2 HP, 15A 125VAC 1/2 HP, No Listings B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 15A 12V G 20A 6V H 20A 3V 4 TERMINATION 2,3 1 3 3 A A 45 8 Bracket .250 (6.4mm) TAB (QC) .187 (4.7mm) TAB (QC) Lamps Illumination Type None # 1 Independent # 2 Independent # 1 Independent & # 2 Independent # 1 Dependent # 1 Independent & # 2 Dependent # 1 Independent & # 2 Dependent # 1 Dependent & # 2 Independent # 1 Both Independent & # 2 (in series) # 1 Dependent & # 2 Dependent # 2 Hazard # 1 Hazard Lamp Wired to Terminals 10+ 12+ 10+ 12+ 4+ 10+ 4+ 10+ 8+ 4+ 10+ 10+ 9119999999999- 4+ 1+ 6+ 6+ 991010- 1212- 6,7 LAMP (SAME CODING FOR BOTH SELECTIONS) Selection 6: above terminals 10 & 9; Selection 7: above terminals 12 & 11 No lamp 0 Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V 7 18V 8 24V LED* Red AmberGreen 2VDC A LF 6VDC B MG 12VDC C NH 24VDC D PJ * Consult factory for “daylight bright”, blue/green and white LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 BRACKET COLOR 1 Standard Bracket Rockerguard at Lamp 1 Rockerguard at Lamp 2 Black White Gray Red 1 2 34 A B CD E F GH 9 ACTUATOR STYLE AND COLOR 1 Black White Gray Red Laser Etched Rocker A B C D3 Paddle J N K M4 10 & 11 LENS STYLE AND COLOR Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens ClearWhite Amber Green Red Blue 1 - B G M T Large Transparent - 7 C H NU Large Translucent 3 - D J PV Bar Transparent - 9 E K RW Bar Translucent 5A - - -- Laser Etched background color 12 LASER ETCHED, LENS OR BODY LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator For legend options & codes, visit us at carlingtech.com 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 - vertical, lamp 1 on top 2 Orientation 2 - horizontal, lamp 1 on right 3 Orientation 3 - vertical, lamp 1 on bottom 4 Orientation 4 - vertical, lamp 1 on left Orientation 1 AA 46 AA 46 3AA-146 Orientation 2 Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 Circuits 30, 31, 58, 69 are not available with rating codes 4, C, D, G or H. 3 Termination 3 only available with rating codes 1, B, and E. 4 Not available with circuits 11-18, 51-57 and 69. S A B C D E F 4 G H J 1 2 Orientation 4 1 Series 3AA-246 Orientation 3 14 ACTUATOR LENS LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator For legend options & codes, visit us at carlingtech.com 140 www.carlingtech.com L-Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Locking - Ordering Scheme L 11 D 1 S W C J 3 Rating 7 Lamp 1 SERIES L 9 Actuator 10 Lens 11 Lock 0 12 Legend 13 Legend Orientation 6 LOCK W Lock above terminals 10 & 9. 2 CIRCUIT 5 Terminal Orientation ( ) - momentary SP - single pole - uses terminals 1, 2 & 4. DP - double pole uses terminals 5, 6 & 8. Terminals 9, 10 & 11 for lamp circuit only. Position:1 2 SP DP 2 & 4, 6 & 8 Connected Terminals 1121 ONNONE 1424 ONNONE 1626 ONOFF 1727 ON OFF 1828 (ON) OFF CIRCUITS WITH JUMPER TERMINALS 30 2 (2,4&5), (1,6&8) OFF, OFF 31 2 1, 2 & 5 2, 3 & 7 PROGRESSIVE CIRCUITS 51 3 & 4 2, 3 52 3 & 4 2, 3 53 (3 & 4) 2, 3 54 (3 & 4) 2, 3 55 (3 & 4) 2, 3 56 (3 & 4) 2, 3 57 3 & 4 2, 3 58 2 & 4 2, 3 61 3 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 3, 6 & 7 62 3 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 3, 6 & 7 63 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 64 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 65 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 66 (3 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 3, 6 & 7 67 3 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 3, 6 & 7 68 2 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 4, OFF 69 2 & 4, 1, 7 & 8 2 & 4, OFF 70 (2 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 4, 5 & 7 71 (2&4), (7 & 8) 2 & 4, 5 & 7 72 2 & 4, 7 & 8 2 & 4, 5 & 7 73 (2 & 4), (7 & 8) 2 & 4, OFF 80 2 & 4, 6 & 8 2 & 4, OFF 3 1 & 2, 5 & 6 OFF ON ON (ON) (ON) (1,2&8), (4,5&6) 2, 4 & 8 1&2 OFF 1&2 (OFF) (1 & 2) (OFF) (OFF) 1&2 1 & 2, 5 & 6 OFF, OFF 1 & 2, 5 & 6 OFF, OFF (1 & 2), (5 & 6) (OFF, OFF) (OFF, OFF) OFF, OFF OFF, OFF (1 & 2), (5 & 7) 1 & 2, 5 & 7 1 & 2, 5 & 7 OFF, OFF OFF, 5 & 6 3 RATING 2 1 .4VA @ 28VDC Resistive 4 10A 250VAC 1/2 HP, 15A 125VAC 1/2 HP, No Listings B 15A 24V C 20A 18V D 20A 12V E 15A 12V G 20A 6V H 20A 3V 4 TERMINATION 4 1 .250 (6.4mm) TAB (QC) 3 .187 (4.7mm) TAB (QC) 7 LAMP Above terminals 12 & 11 No lamp 0 Incandescent 4 3V 5 6V 6 12V LED* Red AmberGreen 2VDC A LF 6VDC B MG 12VDC C NH 24VDC D PJ 7 18V 8 24V * Consult factory for “daylight bright”, blue/green and white LED options. Typical current draw for LED is 20ma. 8 BRACKET COLOR 1 J Black 9 ACTUATOR STYLE AND COLOR 1 BlackRed Locking Rocker PR 10 & 11 LENS STYLE AND COLOR Lens color for LEDs must be clear, white, or match color of LED. 0 - No Actuator Z - No Lens ClearWhite Amber Green Red Blue 1 - B G M T Large Transparent - 7 C H NU Large Translucent 3 - D J PV Bar Transparent - 9 E K RW Bar Translucent 11 LOCK FUNCTION AND COLOR Locking Position Up Down Up & Down Center 3 AH R 1 BJ S 2 CK T 3 DL V 4 EM W 5 Lock Color Match Actuator Black White Red Safety Orange 12 LASER ETCHED, LENS OR BODY LEGEND 00 No legend this location / no actuator For legend options & codes, visit us at carlingtech.com 13 LEGEND ORIENTATION 0 No legend (used with codes 11-18 in selection 12) 1 Orientation 1 - vertical, lamp 1 on top 2 Orientation 2 - horizontal, lamp 1 on right 3 Orientation 3 - vertical, lamp 1 on bottom 4 Orientation 4 - vertical, lamp 1 on left ORIENTATION OF ACTUATOR/LENS IN PANEL ORIENTATION 1 LOCK P LOCK PZAY2-2 LOCK P P LOCK ORIENTATION 2 2 Circuit P M H 00 8 Bracket ORIENTATION 4 1 Series 4 5 6 Termination Illumination Lock P 5 ILLUMINATION LOCK Lamp #1:above terminals 9 & 10 end of switch.; Lamp #2 above terminals 11 & 12 end of switch. Positive (+) and negative (-) symbols apply to LED lamps only. S B Lamps None # 2 P P Illumination Type Lamp Wired to Terminals Independent 12+ LOCK PZAY2-1 ORIENTATION 3 11- Notes: Consult factory to verify horsepower rating for your particular circuit choice. 1 Custom colors are available. Consult factory. 2 Additional lamp circuits available. Consult factory. 3 Available only with 3 position circuits. 4 Termination 3 only available with ratings 1, B and E. 5 Circuits 30, 31, 58 and 69, are not available with rating codes 4, C, D, G or H. www.carlingtech.com 141 L-Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] L-SERIES L-SERIES SHOWN WITH LASER ETCHED ACTUATOR SHOWN WITH ROCKER GUARD 1.970 [50.04] 1.020 [25.91] .435 [10.16] .400 [10.16] 1.450 [36.83] .855 [21.72] L-SERIES L-SERIES SHOWN WITH LARGE LENS AND PADDLE ACTUATOR SHOWN WITH BAR LENS, LOCK AND CONNECTOR 1.970 [50.04] 1.020 [25.91] .453 [11.51] .400 [10.16] Connector LC1-01 LC2-01 LC3-01 12 4 3 2 1 10 12 4 3 2 1 10 Hole Plug L-SERIES CONNECTOR 2.380 [60.45] L-SERIES HOLE PLUG LH1 BLACK .250 TAB CONNECTOR (PACKARD 630 SERIES) BLACK .187 TAB CONNECTOR (PACKARD 480 SERIES) 1.970 [50.04] BLACK .250 TAB CONNECTOR (AMP ONLY) REMOVABLE HOLE PLUG WITH NON-SERRATED WINGS LH2 HOLE PLUG WITH SERRATED WINGS 1.020 [25.91] .500 [12.70] 1.325 [33.66] .920 [23.37] 1.710 [43.43] 142 .790 [20.07] .300 [7.62] .855 [21.72] www.carlingtech.com L-Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Dimensional Specifications Dimensional Specifications: in. [mm] +.008 -.000 +.008 -.000 .984 [25.00] 2.020 [51.31] R .093 MAX TYP R .093 MAX TYP MOUNTING PANEL TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL TEST CUT HOLE IN ACTUAL MATERIAL +.008 -.000 1.900 [48.26] FOR ADDITIONAL UNITS, ADD 1.03 [26.2] PER UNIT. FOR MORE THAN 2 L-SERIES SWITCHES, ADD MIDDLE SECTION. AVAILABLE IN PANEL THICKNESSES LISTED BELOW. CONSULT FACTORY +.008 -.000 1.900 [48.26] DIMENSIONS: LME 2.02 [51.3mm] PLUS NUMBER OF CENTER BEZELS (LMM) X 1.034 [26.26mm] LMS MOUNTING PANEL HOLE MOUNTING PANEL THICKNESS .062 [1.57] .093 [2.36] .125 [3.17] .156 [3.96] MOUNTING PANEL OPENING (2) UNITS 2.300 [58.42] 2.300 [58.42] 1.187 [30.15] 1.030 [26.16] LME MOUNTING PANEL END 1.990 [50.55] 2.300 [58.42] 1.340 [34.04] LMM MOUNTING PANEL MIDDLE LMS MOUNTING PANEL 1.700 [43.18] 1.030 [26.16] 1.030 [26.16] .670 [17.02] 2.300 [58.42] 2.300 [58.42] 3.400 [86.36] 4.430 [112.52] LM3 MOUNTING PANEL PANEL OPENING SIZE: 1.90 X 3.06 [48.3mm X 77.7mm] LM4 MOUNTING PANEL PANEL OPENING SIZE: 1.90 X 4.09 [48.3mm X 103.9mm] 1.030 [26.16] .670 [17.02] 2.300 [58.42] 6.490 [164.85] LM6 MOUNTING PANEL PANEL OPENING SIZE: 1.90 X 6.15 [48.3mm X 156.2mm] www.carlingtech.com 143 L-Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagrams: CIRCUIT CODE CIRCUIT CODE SCHEMATIC 5 4 4 11 22 6 2 4 2 23 2 6 2 1 13 4 2 1 14 2 6 4 54 2 2 1 4 15 6 4 8 5 26 2 4 1 16 1 2 6 4 6 2 1 18 4 2 1 3 31 2 6 2 21 6 4 3 4 58 2 8 1 8 5 30 4 3 57 2 4 4 8 5 28 1 4 3 8 5 2 17 3 56 2 4 4 1 2 6 4 27 1 2 55 2 1 4 3 8 5 25 1 3 53 2 4 4 1 8 5 24 1 4 3 52 2 4 3 5 4 12 SCHEMATIC 1 51 2 144 CIRCUIT CODE SCHEMATIC 4 5 7 2 8 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8 61 2 www.carlingtech.com L-Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Circuit Diagrams Circuit Diagrams: CIRCUIT CODE CIRCUIT CODE SCHEMATIC 3 SCHEMATIC 7 1 62 4 5 4 5 8 71 2 4 1 3 6 8 5 7 2 1 7 63 8 72 2 4 6 7 2 8 3 4 7 64 8 73 2 4 1 3 6 7 2 8 5 5 4 7 65 8 80 2 4 6 6 2 8 3 4 7 5 1 8 81 66 2 4 6 6 2 8 3 1 7 67 5 4 8 82 2 4 6 6 3 8 8 4 1 68 2 3 4 7 8 A2 INTERNAL CONNECTION 7 2 6 8 4 1 69 1 4 7 8 A3 INTERNAL CONNECTION 7 2 1 4 2 5 6 8 70 2 www.carlingtech.com 7 145 L-Series Sealed Rocker Switches - Lamp Circuit Diagrams Lamp Circuit Diagrams: ILLUMIN. CODE ILLUMIN. CODE SCHEMATIC -9 A SCHEMATIC -9 J 1 +1 +4 1 2 +10 -11 B 2 -12 1 INTERNAL CONNECTION +10 +12 -9 C -12 1 2 +10 -9 D 2 2 INTERNAL CONNECTION 1 +10 +12 +4 (–)9 K 1 1 (+)10 -9 E +4 2 1 LEGEND SYMBOL +10 -9 DEFINITION TERMINAL LOCATION +8 LAMP LOCATION F 1 MAINTAINED CIRCUIT 2 MOMENTARY CIRCUIT INTERNAL CONNECTION (JUMPER TERMINAL) +10 -9 +4 2 POSITION CONNECTION G 1 2 P3 P1 2 POSITION +10 -9 P3 H 1 2 P2 P1 3 POSITION +10 146 www.carlingtech.com F-Series Single Pole Toggle Switches - Introduction F-Series F-Series SINGLE POLE TOGGLE SWITCHES General purpose workhorses with options tailored to meet most any need. Ratings to 20A 277VAC, various actuator, bushing, termination, and circuit choices allow this versatile switch to easily integrate into a variety of different applications. The F-Series is appropriate for usage in low voltage DC applications. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Product Highlights: Ratings to 20A Suitable for low voltage 12/24V DC Variety of termination options Consult factory for large choice of bushing/toggle length combinations www.carlingtech.com 147 F-Series Single Pole Toggle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength Mechanical Life Electrical Life Operating Temperature 1000V - live to dead metal parts 100,000 cycles 50,000 cycles - maintained 25,000 cycles - momentary 0°F to 150°F (-17.8°C to +65.6°C) 2FA54 73 / TABS 1 Base Part Number 2 Actuator Style 3 Tab Terminals 2 ACTUATOR STYLE BAT STYLE TOGGLE 2 unsealed sealed 73 78 E3 E8 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 1 10A 250VAC; 15A 125VAC; 3/4 HP 125-250VAC Solder Lug .250 Tab QC Screw Terminals On-None-Off 2FA53 2FA53- . . . /TABS 2FA54 (On)-None-Off 6FA53 6FA53- . . . /TABS 6FA54 On-None-(Off) 6FA57 6FA57- . . . /TABS 6FA58 On-None-On 2FB53 2FB53- . . . /TABS 2FB54 On-None-(On) 6FB53 6FB53- . . . /TABS 6FB54 On-Off-On 2FC53 2FC53- . . . /TABS 2FC54 On-Off-(On) 6FC57 6FC57- . . . /TABS 6FC58 (On-Off-(On) 6FC53 6FC53- . . . /TABS 6FC54 toggle length 0.687 2.000 bushing length 0.465 0.465 3 TAB TERMINALS /TABS Tab Terminals (blank) Leave blank if tab terminals not required. Additional ratings up to 20A 125VAC, 12A 250VAC, 1HP 120-240 VAC available. Consult factory for specifics. Notes: 1 Consult factory for .187 tab, wire lead and combination screw/tab/solder lug termination callouts. 2 Additional toggle options are available. Consult factory. ( ) indicates momentary function. .075[1.91] DIA .125[3.18] DIA 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD .330[8.38] .437[11.09] .394[10.00] .250[6.35] .187[4.74] .187[4.74] KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP SOLDER LUG .687[17.44] .055[1.40] DIA .250 TAB (Q.C.) .187 TAB (Q.C.) TERMINAL TYPE .465[11.81] #6-32NC-2 THREAD .670[17.02] 6.000[152.40] .141[3.58] .370[9.39] .500[12.70] .286[7.26] .348[8.84] 1.134[28.80] SCREW (ASSEMBLED) .062[1.57] .634[16.10] .500[12.70] DIA WIRE LEAD .376[9.55] .500[12.70] DIA .500[12.70] DIA .038[9.65] MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY .125[3.17] DIA WITH LOCKING RING *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 148 www.carlingtech.com G-Series Toggle Switches - Introduction G-Series G-Series TOGGLE SWITCHES General purpose workhorses with options tailored to meet most any need. Ratings to 20A 277VAC, international approvals, various actuator, bushing, termination, and circuit choices allow this toggle switch to easily integrate into a variety of different applications. The G-Series is appropriate for usage in low voltage DC applications. Resources: Download 3D CAD Files IGS STP Product Highlights: Ratings to 20A 277VAC available Metal bat or nylon bat/paddle actuator styles UL, CSA and VDE approvals for select circuits Suitable for low voltage 12/24V DC www.carlingtech.com 149 G-Series Toggle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts & opposite polarity Electrical Life 50,000 cycles - maintained 25,000 cycles - momentary Mechanical Life VDE: 4000V - live to dead metal parts; 1250V - opposite polarity & across open contacts 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature 32°F to 185°F (0° to 85°C) 2GM51 73 1 Base Part Number 2 Actuator Style 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 3 Single Pole in Double Pole base Double Pole 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 3/4 HP 125-250VAC solder lug .250 tab screw term. solder lug 2GA50 2GA51 2GA54 On-None-Off 2GK50 6GA5A 6GA5B 6GA5E (On)-None-Off 6GK5A 6GA5L 6GA5M 6GA5S On-None-(Off) 6GK5L 2GB50 2GB51 2GB54 On-None-On 2GL50 6GB5A 6GB5B 6GB5E On-None-(On) 6GL5A 2GC50 2GC51 2GC54 On-Off-On 2GM50 6GC5A 6GC5B 6GC5E On-Off-(On) 6GM5A 6GC5L 6GC5M 6GC5S (On-Off-(On) 6GM5L 10A 250VAC, 15A 125VAC, 12 (6)A 250VAC T85/55 ENEC/VDE Approved 1 2GA90 2GA91 - On-None-Off 2GK90 2GB90 2GB91 - On-None-On 2GL90 2GC90 2GC91 - On-Off-On 2GM90 Additional ratings up to 20A 125VAC, 12A 250VAC, 1HP 120-240 VAC available. Consult factory for specifics. 2 ACTUATOR STYLE 4 unsealed BAT 73 PADDLE 5 NBL3 BAT 2 D-3B-B 2 PADDLE - sealed 78 NBL8 - D-4B-B .250 tab 2GK51 6GK5B 6GK5M 2GL51 6GL5B 2GM51 6GM5B 6GM5M screw term. 2GK54 6GK5E 6GK5S 2GL54 6GL5E 2GM54 6GM5E 6GM5S 2GK91 2GL91 2GM91 toggle length 0.687 0.687 0.687 0.687 bushing length 0.465 0.465 0.379 0.379 Notes: 1 Not available with 73 or NBL3 style toggles, T55 with 78 and NBL8 style toggles. 2 All nylon bushing and toggle. 3 Consult factory for .187 tab, wire lead and combination screw/tab/solder lug termination callouts. 4 Additional actuator options available. Consult factory. 5 Nylon toggle with black ebanol plated bushing. ( ) Indicates momentary function. .687[17.44] .075[1.91] DIA .125[3.18] DIA .055[1.40] DIA 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD .330[8.38] .187[4.74] .465[11.81] .437[11.09] .394[10.00] .250[6.35] .187[4.74] SOLDER LUG .778[19.76] .250 TAB (Q.C.) .187 TAB (Q.C.) TERMINAL TYPE .422[10.72] .778[19.76] 1.308[33.22] .750[19.05] KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] DP #6-32NC-2 THREAD .187[4.75] 6.000[152.40] .141[3.58] .370[9.39] .187[4.75] .500[12.70] .286[7.26] .350[8.89] SCREW (ASSEMBLED) .490[22.86] PRINTED CIRCUIT .376[9.55] WIRE LEAD .062[1.57] .500[12.70] DIA .500[12.70] DIA .500[12.70] DIA .750[19.05] .075[1.905] IEC APPROVED CONSTRUCTION .038[9.65] MOUNTING HOLE WITH KEYWAY .125[3.17] DIA WITH LOCKING RING *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 150 www.carlingtech.com DK/EK-Series Heavy Duty Toggle Switches - Introducttion DK/EK DK/EK-Series HEAVY DUTY TOGGLE SWITCHES The switch that can handle your heavy duty requirements. Single or double pole with wire lead or screw terminations, and ratings to 20A 125V 10A 250V, the ac/dc DK/EK-Series is the most heavy duty toggle switch in the Carling line. Its sturdy metal construction and stiff actuation force will withstand the abuses of virtually any stringent application. The quick make/quick break contact mechanism is ideal for high voltage DC applications. Product Highlights: Ratings up to 20A 125V AC or DC Screw Term or Wire Lead terminations Quick Make / Quick Break contact mechanism Bat or Ball style toggle options www.carlingtech.com 151 DK/EK-Series Heavy Duty Toggle Switches - General Specifications, Ordering Scheme, Dimensional Specifications Dielectric Strength UL/CSA: 1000V - live to dead metal parts & opposite polarity Mechanical Life 100,000 cycles Operating Temperature Electrical Life 0°F to 150°F (-17.8°C to +65.6°C) 25,000 cycles DK284 1 Base Part Number 2 ACTUATOR STYLE 1 BAT STYLE TOGGLE unsealed toggle length bushing length 73 0.6870.465 1 BASE PART NUMBER: SERIES / POLES / CIRCUITRY / RATING / TERMINATION 8A 250V, 16A 125V, 1 HP 125-250V Screw Terminals Single Pole On-None-Off DA284 Wire Leads Double Pole On-None-Off DK285 10A 250V, 20A 125V, 1 1/2 HP 125-250V Screw Terminals Single Pole On-None-Off EA204 Wire Leads Double Pole On-None-Off EK205 EK204 BALL STYLE TOGGLE unsealed toggle length 32 0.500 DA285 DK284 73 2 Actuator Style bushing length 0.343 Notes: 1 Additional toggle lengths available. Consult factory for details. EA205 #6-32NC-2 THREAD 6.000[152.40] .270[6.86] KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] .465[11.81] 15/32-32UNS-2A THREAD (TYP) .500[12.70] .687[17.44] .765[19.43] TERMINAL TYPE DK SERIES .836[21.23] SCREW (ASSEMBLED) WIRE LEAD 1.750[44.45] 1.764[44.80] KEYWAY .072[1.82] X .038[.965] .062[1.57] .500[12.70] DIA .500[12.70] DIA .465[11.81] .038[9.65] .687[17.44] MOUNTING HOLE .500[12.70] DIA .125[3.17] DIA WITH LOCKING RING EK SERIES .895[22.73] 1.000[25.40] WITH KEYWAY .376[9.55] 2.093[53.16] *Manufacturer reserves the right to change product specification without prior notice. 152 www.carlingtech.com Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. www.carlingtech.com 153 Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. 154 www.carlingtech.com Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. www.carlingtech.com 155 Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. 156 www.carlingtech.com Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. www.carlingtech.com 157 Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. 158 www.carlingtech.com Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. www.carlingtech.com 159 Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. 160 www.carlingtech.com Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. www.carlingtech.com 161 Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. 162 www.carlingtech.com Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. www.carlingtech.com 163 Standard Legend Imprinting Notes: 1 Negative legends not available on L, LD, LW, and N-Series. 2 Many symbols are SAE (J1362), ANSI and ISO approved symbols. Consult factory for custom symbols/icons. 3 Use “body” legend codes for laser etched image identification. 164 www.carlingtech.com Carling Technologies Catalogs There are several catalogs available featuring complete details on all Carling Technologies products. Below is a list of useful information such as catalogs, brochures and videos. Please visit our website at carlingtech.com or scan the QR codes below for complete details. www.carlingtech.com Watch Company Profile Video Switches & Controls Hydraulic-Magnetic SWITCHES & CONTROLS Rocker, Toggle, Pushbutton & Rotary CATALOG Circuit Protection CATALOG catalog catalog Complete line and ordering details for Switches & Control products including Rocker, Toggle, Pushbutton, and Rotary style switches. Complete line and ordering details for all hydraulic-magnetic circuit breakers. Thermal GFCI / ELCI GFCI / ELCI THERMAL Circuit Protection Circuit Protection CATALOG catalog Complete line and ordering details for all thermal circuit breakers. www.carlingtech.com CATALOG catalog Complete line and ordering details for all GFCIs/ELCIs. 165 Carling Technologies Catalogs Marine On-Off Highway MARINE ON/OFF HIGHWAY Switches, Circuit Protection & ELCI/GFCIs Switches & Controls catalog brochure catalog brochure Complete line of ELCIs, thermal and hydraulic-magnetic circuit breakers specific for marine applications. Complete line of switches, controls and custom solutions specific for on-off highway applications. Renewable Energy Military MILITARY RENEWABLE ENERGY Circuit Breakers & Disconnects COTS Switches & Circuit Breakers catalog brochure catalog brochure Complete line of circuit breakers and disconnect products specific for renewable energy applications. Complete line of COTS (Commercial-Off-The-Shelf) switches and circuit breakers specific for military applications. Telecom/Datacom Industrial Automation TELECOM/DATACOM INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION AND CONTROLS Circuit Protection Circuit Protection & Switches catalog brochure Complete line of hydraulic-magnetic circuit breakers specific for telecom/datacom applications. 166 brochure Complete line of switches and circuit breakers specific for industrial automation & controls applications. www.carlingtech.com Reps & Contact Authorized Sales Representatives Click on the group name on the map below to find your local representative or visit www.carlingtech.com/findarep. « « Matera W. Canada Matera E. Canada MIDWEST DM Michigan TEMCO Northwest Alaska, Hawaii « NORTHERN Hanna Lind Ltd. Melody Emery Sierra Bridge Marketing Omega Limited Dy-tronix Inc. LD. Allen Norris DM Assoc East Pacent DM Assoc TSI North TSI WEST Signal Enterprises Luscombe Engineering Pinnacle Marketing Matrix DM Mexico South America Mexico « « Sunbelt Components SOUTHEAST ProRep Solutions LATIN AMERICA Americas Europe Middle East Africa Asia-Pacific Oceania About Carling Founded in 1920, Carling Technologies is a leading manufacturer of electrical and electronic switches and assemblies, circuit breakers, electronic controls, power distribution units, and multiplexed power distribution systems. With four ISO registered manufacturing facilities and technical sales offices worldwide, Carling Technologies Sales, Service and Engineering teams do much more than manufacture electrical components, they engineer powerful solutions! To learn more about Carling please visit www.carlingtech.com/company-profile. To view all of Carling’s environmental, quality, health & safety certifications please visit www.carlingtech.com/environmental-certifications www.carlingtech.com 167 Worlwide Headquarters Asia-Pacific Headquarters 60 Johnson Avenue, Plainville, CT 06062 Tel: (860) 793-9281 Fax: (860) 793-9231 Email: [email protected] Web: www.carlingtech.com Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: Int + 852-2737-2277 Fax: Int + 852-2736-9332 Email: [email protected] Carling Technologies, Inc. Northern Region Sales Office Carling Technologies, Asia-Pacific Ltd. Shenzhen, China [email protected] Europe/Middle East/ Africa Headquarters Carling Technologies Ltd. 4 Airport Business Park, Exeter Airport, Clyst Honiton, Exeter, Devon, EX5 2UL, UK Tel: Int + 44 1392-364422 Fax: Int + 44 1392-364477 Email: [email protected] [email protected] Shanghai, China [email protected] Pune, India Germany [email protected] Kaohsiung, Taiwan France [email protected] Yokohama, Japan Southeast Region Sales Office Midwest Region Sales Office West Region Sales Office Latin America Sales Office [email protected] MI LITARY-C_ 04 _2 016 [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected]